NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual PDF NEC

NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual

NEC NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEC_NEAX2400_IMX_Circuit_Card_Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 343 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

MAY, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

ND-70182 (E)

ISSUE 4

STOCK # 200866

Circuit Card Manual

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the

specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice.

NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its

employees and customers. The information contained herein is

the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced

without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc.

NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.

NEC America, Inc.

Printed in U.S.A.

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 DATE JULY, 1998 DATE APRIL, 1999 DATE MAY, 2000

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual Issue Revision Sheet 1/5

ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

i 1 2 3 4

ii 1 2 3 4

iii 1 2 3 4

iv 1 2 3 4

v 1 2 3 4

vi 1 2 3 4

vii 1 2 3 4

viii 1 2 3 4

1 1 2 3 4

2 1 2 3 4

31234

4123

5 1 2 3 4

6 1 2 3 4

71234

8123

9 1 2 3 4

10 1 2 3 4

11 1 2 3 4

12 1 2 3 4

13 1 2 3 4

14 1 2 3 4

15 1 2 3 4

16 1 2 3 4

17 1 2 3 4

18 1 2 3 4

19 1 2 3 4

20 1 2 3 4

21 1 2 3 4

22 1 2 3 4

23 1 2 3 4

24 1 2 3 4

25 1 2 3 4

26 1 2 3 4

27 1 2 3 4

28 1 2 3 4

29 1 2 3 4

30 1 2 3 4

31 1234

32 1234

33 1 2 3 4

34 1 2 3 4

35 1234

36 1234

37 1 2 3 4

38 1 2 3 4

39 1234

40 1234

41 1 2 3 4

42 1 2 3 4

43 1234

44 1234

45 1 2 3 4

46 1 2 3 4

47 1234

48 1234

49 1 2 3 4

50 1 2 3 4

51 1234

52 1234

53 1 2 3 4

54 1 2 3 4

55 1234

56 1234

57 1 2 3 4

58 1 2 3 4

59 1234

60 1234

61 1 2 3 4

62 1 2 3 4

63 1234

64 1234

65 1 2 3 4

66 1 2 3 4

67 1234

68 1234

PAGE N o. Issue No.

12344567

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 DATE JULY, 1998 DATE APRIL, 1999 DATE MAY, 2000

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual Issue Revision Sheet 2/5

ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4

69 1 2 3 4

70 1 2 3 4

71 1 2 3 4

72 1 2 3 4

73 1 2 3 4

74 1 2 3 4

75 1 2 3 4

76 1 2 3 4

77 1 2 3 4

78 1 2 3 4

79 1 2 3 4

80 1 2 3 4

81 1 2 3 4

82 1 2 3 4

83 1 2 3 4

84 1 2 3 4

85 1 2 3 4

86 1 2 3 4

87 1 2 3 4

88 1 2 3 4

89 1 2 3 4

90 1 2 3 4

91 1 2 3 4

92 1 2 3 4

93 1 2 3 4

94 1 2 3 4

95 1 2 3 4

96 1 2 3 4

97 1 2 3 4

98 1 2 3 4

99 1 2 3 4

100 1 2 3 4

101 1 2 3 4

102 1 2 3 4

103 1 2 3 4

104 1 2 3 4

105 1 2 3 4

106 1 2 3 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

107 1 2 3 4

108 1 2 3 4

109 1 2 3 4

110 1 2 3 4

111 1 2 3 4

112 1 2 3 4

113 1 2 3 4

114 1 2 3 4

115 1 2 3 4

116 1 2 3 4

117 1 2 3 4

118 1 2 3 4

119 1 2 3 4

120 1 2 3 4

121 1 2 3 4

122 1 2 3 4

123 1 2 3 4

124 1 2 3 4

125 1 2 3 4

126 1 2 3 4

127 1 2 3 4

128 1 2 3 4

129 1 3 4

130 1 3 4

131 1 3 4

132 1 3 4

133 1 3 4

134 1 3 4

135 1 3 4

136 1 3 4

137 1 3 4

138 1 3 4

139 1 3 4

140 1 3 4

141 1 3 4

142 1 3 4

143 1 3 4

144 1 3 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 DATE JULY, 1998 DATE APRIL, 1999 DATE MAY, 2000

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual Issue Revision Sheet 3/5

ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4

145 1 3 4

146 1 3 4

147 1 3 4

148 1 3 4

149 3 4

150 3 4

151 3 4

152 3 4

153 3 4

154 3 4

155 3 4

156 3 4

157 3 4

158 3 4

159 3 4

160 3 4

161 3 4

162 3 4

163 3 4

164 3 4

165 3 4

166 3 4

167 3 4

168 3 4

169 3 4

170 3 4

171 3 4

172 3 4

173 3 4

174 3 4

175 3 4

176 3 4

177 3 4

178 3 4

179 3 4

180 3 4

181 3 4

182 3 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

183 3 4

184 3 4

185 3 4

186 3 4

187 3 4

188 3 4

189 3 4

190 3 4

191 3 4

192 3 4

193 3 4

194 3 4

195 3 4

196 3 4

197 3 4

198 3 4

199 3 4

200 3 4

201 3 4

202 3 4

203 3 4

204 3 4

205 3 4

206 3 4

207 3 4

208 3 4

209 3 4

210 3 4

211 3 4

212 3 4

213 3 4

214 3 4

215 3 4

216 3 4

217 3 4

218 3 4

219 3 4

220 3 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 DATE JULY, 1998 DATE APRIL, 1999 DATE MAY, 2000

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual Issue Revision Sheet 4/5

ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4

221 3 4

222 3 4

223 3 4

224 3 4

225 3 4

226 3 4

227 3 4

228 3 4

229 3 4

230 3 4

231 3 4

232 3 4

233 3 4

234 3 4

235 3 4

236 3 4

237 3 4

238 3 4

239 3 4

240 3 4

241 3 4

242 3 4

243 3 4

244 3 4

245 3 4

246 3 4

247 3 4

248 3 4

249 3 4

250 3 4

251 3 4

252 3 4

253 3 4

254 3 4

255 3 4

256 3 4

257 3 4

258 3 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

259 3 4

260 3 4

261 3 4

262 3 4

263 3 4

264 3 4

265 3 4

266 3 4

267 3 4

268 3 4

269 3 4

270 3 4

271 4

272 4

273 4

274 4

275 4

276 4

277 4

278 4

279 4

280 4

281 4

282 4

283 4

284 4

285 4

286 4

287 4

288 4

289 4

290 4

291 4

292 4

293 4

294 4

295 4

296 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 DATE JULY, 1998 DATE APRIL, 1999 DATE MAY, 2000

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual Issue Revision Sheet 5/5

ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4

297 4

298 4

299 4

300 4

301 4

302 4

303 4

304 4

305 4

306 4

307 4

308 4

309 4

310 4

311 4

312 4

313 4

314 4

315 4

316 4

317 4

318 4

319 4

320 4

321 4

322 4

323 4

324 4

325 4

326 4

327 4

328 4

PAGE No. Issue No.

12344567 PAG E No. Issue No.

12344567

ND-70182 (E)

ISSUE 4

MAY, 2000

NEAX2400 IMX

Circuit Card Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ND-70182 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page i

Revision 4.0

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. Mounting Location of Circuit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

SN1374 CPRP-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

SN1401 CPRAC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

PH-M16/PH-M23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

PH-PC40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

PU-SW00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-70182 (E)

Page ii

Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Title Page

ND-70182 (E) LIST OF FIGURES

Page iii

Revision 4.0

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 2-1 Location of SN1374 CPRP-A (CPR) in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 2-2 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 2-3 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 2-4 Location of SN1401 CPRAC-A (CPR) in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Figure 2-5 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Figure 2-7 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Figure 2-8 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 2-9 Location of SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Figure 2-10 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 2-11 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Figure 2-24 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 2-26 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 2-29 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Figure 2-31 Face Layout of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Figure 2-32 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Figure 2-33 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Figure 2-35 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IMX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Figure 2-36 PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 2-37 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Figure 2-38 External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Figure 2-39 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Figure 2-40 Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of the PH-PC20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Figure 2-42 Location of PH-PC40 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Figure 2-43 Face Layout of the PH-PC40 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Figure 2-44 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Figure 2-45 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

LIST OF FIGURES ND-70182 (E)

Page iv

Revision 4.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-46 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Figure 2-47 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 2-48 PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Figure 2-49 Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Figure 2-51 PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Figure 2-52 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Figure 2-53 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 2-54 TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 2-55 Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 2-56 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 2-57 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Figure 2-58 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Figure 2-59 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 2-60 Face Layout of PU-SW00 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Figure 2-61 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 2-62 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Figure 2-63 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Figure 2-64 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IMX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Figure 2-65 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Figure 2-66 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 2-67 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Figure 2-69 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Figure 2-70 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Figure 2-71 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Figure 3-6 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 3-11 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Figure 3-12 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Figure 3-14 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks

from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 3-16 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Figure 3-17 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . 180

Figure 3-18 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Figure 3-19 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Figure 3-20 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 3-21 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Figure 3-22 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

ND-70182 (E) LIST OF FIGURES

Page v

Revision 4.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-23 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Figure 3-24 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Figure 3-25 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Figure 3-26 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Figure 3-27 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 3-28 Cable Connection (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks

from an External Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 3-29 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Figure 3-30 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock

from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Figure 3-32 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Figure 3-33 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Figure 3-34 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Figure 3-35 LT Connector Lead Location (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Figure 3-36 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Figure 3-37 Face Layout of HMATI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Figure 3-38 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Figure 3-39 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Figure 3-40 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Figure 3-41 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Figure 3-42 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Figure 3-43 Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Figure 3-44 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Figure 3-45 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Figure 3-49 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Figure 3-50 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Figure 3-51 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Figure 3-52 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Figure 3-53 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Figure 3-54 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Figure 3-55 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Figure 3-56 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Figure 3-58 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Figure 3-59 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Figure 3-60 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 3-65 LC Connector Lead Accommodation (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Figure 3-66 Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Figure 3-67 Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Figure 3-68 Cable Running of LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Figure 3-69 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

LIST OF FIGURES ND-70182 (E)

Page vi

Revision 4.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-70 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Figure 3-71 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Figure 3-72 FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Figure 3-73 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Figure 3-74 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 3-75 Location of the PA-8RSTM Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Figure 3-76 Location of PA-8RSTY (RST) Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Figure 3-77 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Figure 3-79 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Figure 3-80 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Figure 3-81 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Figure 3-82 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Figure 3-83 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Figure 3-84 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Figure 3-85 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Figure 3-86 Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Figure 3-87 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Figure 3-88 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

LIST OF TABLES

Table Title Page

ND-70182 (E) LIST OF TABLES

Page vii

Revision 4.0

Table 3-1 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Table 3-2 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Table 3-3 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Table 3-4 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Table 3-5 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Table 3-6 Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

LIST OF TABLES ND-70182 (E)

Page viii

Revision 4.0

This page is for your notes.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 1

Revision 4.0

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1. General

This manual provides the circuit card description for the NEAX2400 IMX system.

This manual is for those persons who are involved in the system setup and administration activities for the

NEAX2400 IMX. For each circuit card the following items are explained:

• General function

• Slot to mount the circuit card

• Precautions for mounting the card

• Location of the electronic devices on the card surface

• Description of the LED

• Description of the switches

• Physical interface

The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the

Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card.

• Control Circuit Card

White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the

Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs.

• Line/Trunk Circuit Card

Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.

Note: This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IMX.

When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card

Manual with the following changes:

• The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IMX;

however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI).

• The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IMX) is

the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS.

• The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manual’s section on

PH-PC36 (MUX).

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 2

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

2. Mounting Location of Circuit Card

The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots, as shown in Figure

1-1. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots, as shown in

Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-2. The control circuit cards for the IMX-U system should be mounted in their

dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-3 through Figure 1-3.

As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in

Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM).

The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM.

Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 3

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-SW10(TSW)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-IO24(IOC)

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 4

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-IO24(IOC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG0

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 5

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

PH-PC20(DLKC0)

PH-PC20(DLKC1)

PH-GT09(GT0)

PH-GT09(GT1)

PH-SW12(TDSW00)

PH-SW12(TDSW01)

PH-SW12(TDSW02)

PH-SW12(TDSW03)

PH-SW12(TDSW10)

PH-SW12(TDSW11)

PH-SW12(TDSW12)

PH-SW12(TDSW13)

PH-CK16/17(PLO0)

PH-CK16/17(PLO1)

(MISC)

TSWM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG1

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 6

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG2

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 7

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG3

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 8

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (1/5)

PWR1 (PH-PW14)

PWR0 (PH-PW14)

HSW00 (PU-SW01)(RES)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

HSW11 (PU-SW01)(RES)

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

TSW02 (PU-SW00)

TSW03 (PU-SW00)

TSW10 (PU-SW00)

TSW11 (PU-SW00)

TSW12 (PU-SW00)

TSW13 (PU-SW00)

PLO0

(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PLO1

(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

TOPU

ISWM

BASEU PWR

FDD/HDD

DSP

ISW

LPN

IOC(PH-IO24)

MMC(PH-M22)

EMA(PH-PC40)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

PWR(PZ-PW106) PWR(PZ-PW106)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

ISAGT(PZ-GT13) ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

Note

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

IMG3

Dummy

PIM

IMG2

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0

LPM

ISW

NEAX2400IMX

IMX-U SYSTEM

ISWM

ISW

LPM

LN 4 (0 3)

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 9

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (2/5)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-IO24(IOC)

PH-M22(MMC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

IMG3

Dummy

PIM

IMG2

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG0

NEAX2400IMX

IMX-U SYSTEM

ISWM

ISW

LPM

LN 4 (0 3)

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 10

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (3/5)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PIM0

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

(MISC)

TSWM0

PIM

IMG3

Dummy

PIM

IMG2

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG1

NEAX2400IMX

IMX-U SYSTEM

ISWM

ISW

LPM

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LN 4 (0 3)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1

Page 11

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (4/5)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

PIM

IMG3

Dummy

PIM

IMG2

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG2

NEAX2400IMX

IMX-U SYSTEM

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-CK18 (CLK1)

TSWM1

ISWM

ISW

LPM

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LN 4 (0 3)

CHAPTER 1 ND-70182 (E)

Page 12

Revision 4.0

INTRODUCTION

Mounting Location of Circuit Card

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (5/5)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

Dummy

PIM

IMG3

Dummy

PIM

IMG2

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG3

NEAX2400IMX

IMX-U SYSTEM

ISWM

ISW

LPM

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LN 4 (0 3)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 13

Revision 4.0

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card.

• General Function

Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card.

• Mounting Location/Condition

Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there

are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

• Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face

layout.

• Lamp Indications

The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

• Switch Settings

Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning,

standard setting, etc.

• External Interface

If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting

slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are

provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector

lead locations and the connecting routes are shown.

In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of

the explanation for each circuit card.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 14

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

1. General Function

The Central Processing Rack (CPR) consists of the following components.

(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access

Memory (RAM). Also, this board may be equipped with the ISAGT (PZ-GT16) on

its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral

Component Interconnect (PCI).

(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

card, which can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation, if

required.

(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR, and also the MISC slots of the LPM.

Figure 2-1 Location of SN1374 CPRP-A (CPR) in the System

DSP

CPULANI

LANI

To HUB

To I/O local bus

CPR#0

DSP

CPU LANI

LANI

To HUB

CPR#1

To MISC bus

ISAGT ISAGT

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 15

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The CPR is composed of a CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD and PWR, and is located in the Local Processor

Module (LPM) as shown below. Since the CPR provides the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and

Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the GT and LANI cards are located in those busses

respectively.

Figure 2-2 CPR Location

Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

PT-2200 (CPU BOARD)

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPR

LPM

PIM0 BSCM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 16

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The CPR has the following lamps, switches and connectors.

Slot numbers 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and slot numbers 4-6 are the

Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

Figure 2-3 Front View of CPR

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

HDD

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

GT1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

GT2

GT0

GT3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR (PZ-PW92)

FDD/HDD (PZ-IO27) DSP (PZ-DK224)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 17

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

4. Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD

(HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD is being accessed.

WDT

(DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE

(DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0

(DSP) Green Lights green when PZ-GT16 (located in Slot 6) is in active state.

Flashes green when PZ-GT16 (located in Slot 6) is in stand-by state

IMG1 (DSP) Green Not used.

IMG2 (DSP) Green Not used

IMG3 (DSP) Green Not used

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 18

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or “E” means the

processing failed.

LAMP

NAME DESCRIPTION

STATUS

(DSP)

Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by

the Sense switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST button is pressed. The 7-

segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.

SENSE STATUS DESCRIPTION

LEFT RIGHT

Not used

“F”

“c”

“d”

1. When Program Install

The HD in the CPR initializes and the program installs. (These processes

execute)

“F” indicated during HD format.

“c” indicated when copying data from FD

“d” indicated while creating the directory on the HD

Not used “1”

2. When Program Load

After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to

the memory.

“1” indicated during this process.

“0-9” “0-9”

3. On-line active CPR

The active CPR in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate in

percentages (00-99%)

Not used

“S”

“b”

“y”

4. On-line stand-by CPR

The stand-by CPR in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”

Not used

5. Program & Office data load

“1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to

memory

“0” indicated during the Office data load.

3 Not used “c” “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

5 Not used

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

“1” indicated during the Program load.

“0” indicated during the process.

6 Not used “F” “F” indicated during HD format.

C Not used “H” The CPR is starting-up with OFF LINE.

“H” indicated during the ROM data loading.

“1” “0”

Segment Spinning Indication

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 19

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

5. Switch Settings

Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being

accessed.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(PWR) —ON ×PWR is supplied to the CPR.

OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

MB Note

(FDD/HDD) —ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting

MBR

(DSP) —ON (Up) Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is

located.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting

CPURST — — Execute the CPR processing according to the

SENSE setting.

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

1OFF ×Not used

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

OFF ×Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF

2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF

3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF

4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF

5~8 OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP) 1~8 OFF ×Not used

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 20

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

Note: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SENSE

Note

The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

• HD format

• File copied from FDD to HD

• Directory created on the HD

2 On-line mode

3 File copied from FDD to HD in the FDD/HD

4 The directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD

5OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by

loading the ROM data

6 HD format of the FDD/HDD

C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

(PWR)

(FDD/HDD)

MBR

(DSP)

NMI-SEL

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

OFF

1234ON

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 21

Revision 4.0

SN1374 CPRP-A

CPU Board

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP)

SENSE

(DSP)

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

1234ON

5678

1234ON

5678

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 22

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

1. General

The CPR consists of the following components.

(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access

Memory (RAM). Additionally, this board may be equipped with the ISAGT (PZ-

GT13) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on

the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).

(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

card, which can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation, if

necessary.

(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.

Figure 2-4 Location of SN1401 CPRAC-A (CPR) in the System

DSP DSP

LANI

LANI LANI

LANI

CPU CPU

ISAGT ISAGT

To I/O local bus

To MISC bu s

To HUB

To H U B

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 23

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local

Processor Module (LPM) as shown below. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard Architecture

(ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the GT and LANI cards are located in those

busses respectively.

Figure 2-5 CPR Location

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPR

LPM

PIM0 BSCM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 24

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The CPR has the following lamps, switches and connectors.

Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial

Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR

4. Lamp Indications

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD

(FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurs.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Lights green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in active state.

Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in stand-by state.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

HDD

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27) DSP(PZ-DK224)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 25

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or else “E” means

the processing failed.

LAMP

NAME DESCRIPTION

STATUS

(DSP)

Two set of “7-segment LED” shows the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the

SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment

LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.

SENSE STATUS DESCRIPTION

LEFT RIGHT

Not used

“F”

“c”

“d”

1. When Program Install

The HD in the CPR initializes and the program is installed. (These processes ex-

ecute)

“F” indicated during HD format.

“c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

“d” indicated while creating the directory on the HD

Not used “1”

2. When Program Load

After the program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to

the memory.

“1” indicated during this process.

“0-9” “0-9”

3. On-line active CPR

The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate in

percentages. (00-99%)

Not used

“S”

“b”

“y”

4. On-line stand-by CPR

The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”

Not used

5. Program & Office data load

“1” indicated during the Program and Office data transferred from the HD to

the memory

“0” indicated during the Office data load

3 Not used “c” “c” indicated during copy the data from FD to HD

4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

5 Not used

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

“1” indicated during the Program load.

“0” indicated during the process.

6 Not used “F” “F” indicated during HD format.

C Not used “H” The CPR is starting-up with OFF LINE.

“H” indicated during the ROM data loading.

“1” “0”

Segment Spinning Indication

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 26

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

5. Switch Settings

Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being

accessed.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(PWR) —ON ×PWR is supplied to the CPR.

OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

MB Note

(FDD/HDD) —ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

MBR

(DSP) —ON (Up) Make-busy Request of the CPR in which the

GT is located.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

CPURST — — Execute the CPR processing according to the

SENSE setting.

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

1OFF ×Not used

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

OFF ×Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF

2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF

3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF

4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON

OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF

5~8 OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP) 1~8 OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 27

Revision 4.0

SN1401 CPRAC-A

CPU Board

Note: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SENSE

Note

The following three process are executed at the FDD/HDD.

• HD format

• File copied from FDD to HD

• Directory created on the HD

2×On line mode.

3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD.

4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD.

5OAI memory clear, and the CPR starts up in ON LINE mode by loading the

ROM data.

6 HD format of the FDD/HDD.

C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

(PWR)

(FDD/HDD)

MBR

(DSP)

NMI-SEL

SYSTEM

SELECT0

SYSTEM

SELECT1

SYSTEM

SELECT2

SENSE

OFF

12 3 4 ON

1234ON

56 7 8

1234ON

5678

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 28

Revision 4.0

PH-GT09

Gate

PH-GT09

Gate

1. General Function

The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The

CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.

Figure 2-7 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System

PLO0

PLO1

TDSW03

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW13

TDSW02

TDSW12

TDSW01

TDSW11

TDSW00

DLKC0

MISC

ISAGT

DSP

CPULANI

LANI

TDSW10

CPR #0

To HUB

ISAGT

DLKC1

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

MISC Bus

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 29

Revision 4.0

PH-GT09

Gate

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM

GT1

GT0

MBR

OPE/MB

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 30

Revision 4.0

PH-GT09

Gate

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Make-busy of circuit card

DOWN ×Normal setting

MBR

Note

UP When the ACT side of GT’s MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of

TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When the

TSW is dual configuration.)

DOWN ×Normal setting.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MBR

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 31

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

1. General Function

The CPR consists of the following components.

(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access

Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) on

its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the

Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).

(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in

operation.

(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.

Figure 2-9 Location of SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A (CPR)

LANI

HDD

FDD

HDD

FDD

CPU CPU

DSP DSP

ISAGT ISAGT

CPR#0 CPR#1

To HUB

To I/O local bus

To MISC bus

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 32

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local

Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-10. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard

Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are

located in those busses respectively.

Figure 2-10 CPR Location

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPR

LPM

ISWM/PIM0 BSCM

Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IMX-U system only.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 33

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors.

Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial

Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

Figure 2-11 Front View of CPR

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in

the IMG.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD

(FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

HDD

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27) DSP(PZ-DK224)

Note

Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IMX-U system only.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 34

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the ISW

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in slot number 6) is in operation.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.

Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 35

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates “E”

meaning the processing failed.

LAMP

NAME DESCRIPTION

STATUS

(DSP)

Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the

SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment

LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.

SENSE STATUS DESCRIPTION

LEFT RIGHT

Not used

“F”

“c”

“d”

1. When Program Install

The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three

processes execute)

“F” indicated during HD format.

“c” indicated when copying data from FD to HD

“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

Not used “1”

2. When Program Load

After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD

to memory.

“1” is indicated during this process.

“0-9” “0-9”

3. On-line active CPR

The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy

rate by percentage. (00-99%)

Not used

“S”

“b”

“y”

4. On-line stand-by CPR

The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”

Not used

5. Program & Office data load

“1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to

the memory

“0” indicated during the Office data load

3 Not used “c” “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

5 Not used

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

“1” indicated during the Program load.

“0” indicated during the process.

6 Not used “F” “F” indicated during HD format.

C Not used “H” The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.

“H” indicated during the ROM data loading.

“1” “0”

Segment Spinning Indication

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 36

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

5. Switch Settings

Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being

accessed.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(PWR) —ON ×PWR is supplied to the CPR.

OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

MB Note

(FDD/HDD) —ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

MBR

(DSP) —ON (Up) Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is

located.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

CPURST

(DSP) —— Execute the CPR processing according to the

SENSE setting.

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

1OFF ×Not used

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

OFF ×Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.

2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.

3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.

4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.

5~7 OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

8ON IMX-U System

OFF 1 IMG/4 IMG System

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP) 1~8 OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 37

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

Note: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SENSE

(DSP)

Note

The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

• HD formatted

• File copied from FDD to HD

• Directory created on the HD

2×On-line mode.

3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD.

4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD.

5OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading

the ROM data.

6 HD format of the FDD/HDD.

C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 38

Revision 4.0

SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A

CPU Board

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

(PWR)

(PWR:PZ-PW106)

(FDD/HDD)

MBR

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP)

SENSE

(DSP)

OFF

12 3 4 ON

1234 ON

56 7 8

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 39

Revision 4.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

1. General Function

The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface for permitting the CPU board to control the

TSW, HSW, and PLO cards within the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW. Additionally, this

circuit card is equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both

systems (single/dual). This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system.

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT)

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

(IOGT1)

PH-GT10

(IOGT0)

PH-GT10

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 40

Revision 4.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)

ISWM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

IOGT(#0)

IOGT(#1)

MBR

OPE/MB

PWRALM

CA4L

COPY

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 41

Revision 4.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING

TSW ACT

Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

OFF This circuit card is in ST-BY state.

Red Lights when this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PWRALM Red Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal.

CA4L Red Lights when 4MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty.

COPY Green Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit Card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit Card make busy cancel

MBR UP Make busy request

DOWN ×Make busy request cancel

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

MB Note: Normal operating mode is down.

MBR Note: Normal operating mode is down.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 42

Revision 4.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

1. General Function

This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated

with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IMX-U system, and 2)

distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this processing

solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL management

even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM of any

node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration.

For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the “Feature

Programming Manual”.

• Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2]

• Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9]

Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

IMX-U System

ATI

(TSW 1) (TSW 1)

(TSW 1)

TSW/HSW 1

DLMX 0

(DLMX 1)

OUT

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

TSW 0 TSW 0

TSW 0

TSW/HSW 0

LN 0 LN 1

LN 2

LN 3

ISW

Note

: Circuit Card

: Circuit Card (No. 1 System)

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC

: BLF/TGBL data to ATI

(No. 1 system)

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC

(No. 1 system)

BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible

TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp

Note: IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW.

OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW.

This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of LN0.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 43

Revision 4.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

2. Mounting Location/Condition

When this circuit card is used in a single configuration.

Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:

1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23.

2. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.

3. To used this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ASDT command.

4. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same

Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a

DLMX card is mounted).

When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration.

Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:

1. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW).

2. This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23).

3. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.

4. To use this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ASDT command.

HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8

Highway block

DLMX

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23

DLMX

Mounting Module

PIM

Mounting Condition

HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8

Highway Block

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

Mounting Module

PIM

Mounting Condition

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 44

Revision 4.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches

The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

ACT Green Lights when this circuit card is in a active state.

OFF Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state.

LYR OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation.

LB OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation.

LOAD OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation.

PWALM Red Lights when OBP alarm

ACT

PWALM

LOAD

LYR

MB KEY

OPE

MNT

MODE

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 45

Revision 4.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel

MNT

0OFF×Fixed to OFF.

1OFF×Fixed to OFF.

2OFF×Fixed to OFF.

3ON Make-busy-request.

OFF Cancel the make-busy-request.

MODE 0×Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection)

1-7 Not used

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MNT

MODE

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 46

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The

-48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in

the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be

selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone

circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-A (PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 47

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

PIM

(PA-PW54-A)

DPWR

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 48

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW54

-A

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

25A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 49

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW —ON ×–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.

RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting.

MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting.

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 50

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ON 12

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 51

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.

The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card

in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and

voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a

Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs).

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-B (PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 52

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

DPWR

(PA-PW54-B)

PIM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 53

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW54

- B

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

20A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 54

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW —ON ×–48V input power is supplied.

OFF –48V input power is not supplied.

RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 55

Revision 4.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW4

20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ON 12

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 56

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

PA-PW55-A

Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48

V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the

associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage

can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler

Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-A (PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 57

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

(PA-PW55-A)

PIM

Mounting Module

PIM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 58

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-21.

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW55

-A

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

25A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 59

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48 V SW ON ×–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.

RESET PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 60

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 61

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

PA-PW55-B

Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.

The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card

in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output

frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card.

In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card Within the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs).

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-B (PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 62

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

(PA-PW55-B)

PIM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 63

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW55

-B

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

20A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

SW4

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 64

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW ON ×–48V input power is supplied.

OFF –48V input power is not supplied.

RESET PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 65

Revision 4.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW4

20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ON 12

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 66

Revision 4.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

1. General Function

The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C,

between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message

Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI). Property Management System

(PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is

composed in a dual configuration.

Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

Figure 2-24 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card within the System

CPU

BOARD

FDD/HDD #0

GT #1 GT #0

MISC

EMA

MISC/IOC

CPU

I/O

BOARD

MISC I/O BUS

FDD/HDD #1

I/O

IOC

for

Hotel

IOC

for

Business

MAT

SMDR

MCI

PMS

Hotel Printer

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 67

Revision 4.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The IOC cards can be accommodated in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.

Note: When using Business system and Hotel system, prepare the circuit card for each system.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card

LPM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04

IOC #1

IOC #0

OPE

IOC ALM

PORT0

SW50

MBR

PORT1

PORT2

PORT3

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 68

Revision 4.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

4. Lamp Indications

The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.

5. Switch Settings

The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard set-

ting, it is indicated with “×” in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating normally.

Red This circuit card is placed in the make busy state.

IOC ALM Red Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor.

PORT0 - PORT3 RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3)

SDn Green SD:Send Data

RDn Green RD:Receive Data

ERn Green ER:Equipment Ready

DRn Green DR:Data Ready

CDn Green CD:Carrier Detect

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MB UP The circuit card is placed into a make busy status.

DOWN ×Cancellation of Make Busy.

MBR UP The circuit card is placed into a make busy request status.

DOWN ×Cancellation of Make Busy Request.

SW50

1ON This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1.

OFF This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.

2ON Not used (For Business System Only).

OFF ×

2ON Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only).

OFF ×Free Wheeling.

3ON Not used

OFF ×

4ON Not used

OFF ×

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 69

Revision 4.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

6. External Interface

As illustrated below, the “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable is required to connect external equipment such as

the MAT, SMDR, MCI and PRT.

Figure 2-26 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)

Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below.

The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting

slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below.

The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or

whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the

connecting cables is explained in the “Installation Procedure

Manual”.

MISC 3B/4B (Note 1)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Backplane

PH-IO24

(IOC)

Circuit #0

Circuit #1

Circuit #2

Circuit #3

RS-232C cable (Note 2)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MISC 3A/4A (Note 1)

ST2

ST1

PB/CI

04 CS

03 RS

02 RD

01 SD

Pin Signal name

TYP0, 1 Connector

AMP AMP

TYP0 TYP1 TYP1TYP0

To RS-232C

Terminal

TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation

Note 1:

Note 2:

Mounting Slot

IOC Circuit Number

#0, #1

#2, #3

#0, #1

#2, #3

MISC 3B

MISC 3A

MISC 4B

MISC 4A

MISC Connector

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 70

Revision 4.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MBR

SW50

Meaning of SW50-1:

ON:

OFF: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card.

This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.

2 3 4

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 71

Revision 4.0

PH-M22

MMC

PH-M22

MMC

1. General Function

The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are:

•To collect the key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/

the other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW.

•To collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU

display.

This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system.

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-M22 (MMC)

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK227

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

SEL

RELAY

RECEIVER

ISEL

ISW

AUDIBLE

AND

VISUAL

ALARM

INDICATING

PANEL

KEY INFORMATION

ALM INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 72

Revision 4.0

PH-M22

MMC

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04

MMC

CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

OPE

CN7

CN6

CN5

CN4

CN3

CN2

CN1

CN0

KEY

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 73

Revision 4.0

PH-M22

MMC

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in operation.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit Card make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit Card make-busy cancel

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 74

Revision 4.0

PH-M22

MMC

6. External Interface

Figure 2-29 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel

01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05

MPALM

EXTAA

BELAA

MNAA

SUPAA

MJAA

MNBA

SUPBA

MJBA

BELAA

MNAA

SUPAA

MJAA

MNBA

SUPBA

MJBA

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

MDF

MJ/MN/BELL

-48V

(RPT0)

(RPT1)

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL

ALARM INDICATING PANEL

MDF MJ

BELL

(BASEU)

LPM

MISC0A

Connector

RPT Terminal on front

of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00

68PH EXMISC CA

68PH EXMISC CA and

Installation Cable

68PH EXMISC CA

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 75

Revision 4.0

PH-M22

MMC

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MB Note: Normal operating mode is down.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 76

Revision 4.0

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

1. General Function

This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports to

send Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and

send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.

Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/au-

tomatic trunk test at the same time is only one.

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card Within the System

TSW

TEL

PIM

LPRA

LTST

TEST

EQ GT

EXGT

CPU

EXTENDED I/O BUS

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 77

Revision 4.0

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:

Note: IMX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02.

IMX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 Face Layout of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card

Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

LPM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04

PH-M16/PH-M23

OPE/MB

SW0

CRIN

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 78

Revision 4.0

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

4. Lamp Indications

5. Switch Settings

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating in normal mode.

Red This circuit card is Make-busy.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Setting of a condition of DT detection

(440Hz+350Hz)

2ON ×Setting of a condition of RBT detection

(440Hz+480Hz)

3ON Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msec.)

OFF ×Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.)

ON Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with

sending test tone of ODT

(Set soft control or E-wire loop-back)

OFF Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with

sending test tone of ODT

(Set soft control only)

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER

SW0

5678TIME

ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ

ON ON OFF OFF 16µ

ON ON ON OFF 32µ

ON ON ON ON 64µ

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 79

Revision 4.0

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

6. External Interface

Figure 2-32 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

00 01 02 03 04

PH-M16/PH-M23

Circuit Card Backboard Connector

Connector Name

Slot Number

LPM

LPM Backboard

MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector

MISC CONNECTOR

68PH EXMISC CABLE

MISC Connector Accommodation

TELB

LCB

THOWB

THOWS

INB

TELA

LCA

THOWA

ONHK

INA

SE TCR

ATM

ATAATB OUTAOUTB TA1TB1

MISC CONNECTOR

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 80

Revision 4.0

PH-M16/PH-M23

Line Test

Figure 2-32 Connecting Route Diagram

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW0

OUTA

INA

INB

TA1

TB1

LTST

TLT

PBX MDP

ON (MB)

OFF

ON 2345678

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 81

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

1. General Function

The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between

the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface

for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this

circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

information and digital data information.

Figure 2-33 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System

MUX

CPR

LC/TRK

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 82

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 3

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 2

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 1

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

GT 1

GT 0

CPR 1

ISAGT

CPR 0

ISAGT

DLKC 1

DLKC 0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 83

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

Figure 2-35 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IMX-U System

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

ISW

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 84

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

The PCM highway running is illustrated in the figure below. There are sixteen 2Mbps PCM highways

(HW0 - HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance,

highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the

Group 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the Groups 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Groups 24 and

25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM).

All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway × 16 highways

= 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW

circuit card across the 32.786Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS).

Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/

trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX.

In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits

of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).

Figure 2-36 PCM Highway Running

MUX#1

MUX#0

HW6

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

1011

12131415

16171819

20212223

1415

1617

(24)

(25)

2627

2829

31 30

2627

2829

3031

HW0 HW1 HW2

HW3 HW4

HW5

HW8 HW9 HW10

HW12

HW7

HW1

HW15

Slot number of the PIM U-A

Group (G) number of the LENS

8 circuits of CFTs

Group 24 and 25 are used

for the SPM 2Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway

HW13

HW11

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 85

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

2. Mounting Location/Condition

For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3.

For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

PIM

MUX #0

MUX #1

SW01

OFFON

MUXACT

SYNC

RCLK ALM

PMCLK ALM

CFT OPE

MUX

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 86

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

MUX ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

SYNC Green Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the

MUX and TSW.

RCLK ALM Red Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred.

PMCLK ALM Red

Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred.

•2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks)

•Frame Head signal

•4 Mbps clock signals

CFT OPE Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW01

1ON 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid.

OFF 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid.

2ON Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.

OFF ×Setting µ-Law in the CFT function block.

3OFF ×Not used

4OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 87

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

6. External Interface

For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are shown in Figure 2-38.

Figure 2-38 External Interface for PH-PC36

TDSW

MUX

#0 MUX

MUX

TDSW

MT24 TDSW CA-180

MT24 TDSW CA-140

MT24 TDSW CA-90

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 88

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are shown in Figure 2-39. As seen in this illustration,

the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the “MUX###” connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB)

of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual for more details.

Figure 2-39 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy/TSWM

IMG2

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

TSWM

IMG1

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM

IMG0

PIM

BWB of TSWM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 89

Revision 4.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

1ON

2 3 4

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 90

Revision 4.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

1. General Function

This circuit card simultaneously provides all the Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-

IMG system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT

calls, or the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.

Figure 2-40 Location of PC-PH20 in the System

Note: MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the

DLKC.

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

DLKC0 DLKC1

GT1

ISAGT1ISAGT0

CPU0 CPU1

GT0

ATTCON

TSW

ISA BUS

MISC I/O BUS

Note

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM

DLKC#0

DLKC#1

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 91

Revision 4.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-41.

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of the PH-PC20 Card

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB

Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is ab-

normal.

PWR ALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.

OPE/MB

PWR ALM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 92

Revision 4.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 93

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

1. General Function

The PH-PC40 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and

sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the

system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the

CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold

sending function.

Figure 2-42 Location of PH-PC40 (EMA) Card in the System

DSP

CPU

CPR #0

EMA

IOC

MISC

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

MISC Bus # 0 MISC Bus # 1

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 94

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PH-PC40 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-43.

Figure 2-43 Face Layout of the PH-PC40 (EMA) Card

Mounting Module

LPM

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PH-PC40 (EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

OPE/MB

ACT1

CKERR1

ACT0

EMASUP

CPU SEL

NMI SEL

CKERR0

SW65

SW62

SW73

SW70

SW92

SW A0

MRTC

CPW-STAT

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 95

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: Set CPUSEL switch downward, if it is single CPU system.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB Green Indicates the circuit card is operating normally.

Red Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state.

ACT1 Green CPU #1 is in the ACT state.

CKERR 1 Red CPU #1 clock failure has occurred.

ACT0 Green CPU #0 is in the ACT state.

CKERR 0 Red CPU #0 clock failure has occurred.

EMSUP Green Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .)

OFF Enable to the CPU change-over.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Make-busy of the circuit card.

DOWN Normal setting

EMASUP UP Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.

DOWN ×Normal setting

CPUSEL

UP Forced activating the CPU #1.

MIDDLE ×Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note

DOWN Forced activating the CPU #0.

NMISEL UP Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU

when a fault occurs.

DOWN ×Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 96

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW62

Note 1

1ON Power Shut Down (PSDN) function

(used in Australia only)

OFF ×

2ON

OFF ×

3ON

OFF ×

4ON

OFF ×

SW65

1ON ×Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when

this circuit card is used in the one frame stack configura-

tion).

OFF CPU-ACT Signal does not output.

2ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

3ON Dual CPU configuration

OFF Single CPU configuration

4ON ×PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the

TOPU.

OFF PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU.

SW70

1ON External music on hold source (FM lead) is used.

OFF Internal music on hold source IC is used.

2ON Output the alarm information for the external indicator

(used in Australia only).

OFF ×Alarm information does not output.

SW73

1ON ×Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid.

OFF PFT control is invalid.

2ON ×µ-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

OFF A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

SW62 ON OFF

SW62-1 IMG#0 valid IMG0# invalid

SW62-2 IMG#1 valid IMG1# invalid

SW62-3 IMG#2 valid IMG2# invalid

SW62-4 IMG#3 valid IMG3# invalid

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 97

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

Note: SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW92

Note

SWA0

Note

1MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF.

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Not Used OFF ON Buzzer

Not Used ON OFF Chime

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 98

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

6. External Interface

External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external

equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-44.

Figure 2-44 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold

01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05

MJB

MNA

FM0

FM1

MPALM

MJA

MNA

BELL

50 EXTA EXTB

16PH EXALM CA FM0

MJA

MNA

BELL

MJB

MNB

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

CABLING DIAGRAM

CROSS CONNECTION

MDF EXTERNAL

MUSIC

SOURCE

MJ/MN/BELL

-48V

(RPT0)

(RPT1)

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL

ALARM INDICATING PANEL

MDF MJ

BELL

EALM Connector

EMA

(Slot No.04)

16PH EXALM CA

(BASEU)

LPM Installation

Cable

RPT Terminal on front

of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 99

Revision 4.0

PH-PC40

Emergency Alarm Controller

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

EMA-SUP

CPU-SEL

NMI-SEL

SWA0

SW62

SW65

SW70

SW73

SW92

1234ON

5678

1234ON

12ON

1234ON

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 100

Revision 4.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

PH-PW14

Power Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted

in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5

V, and +12 V to MISC slots.

The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.

Figure 2-45 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram

Con-

troller Con-

troller

DC-

DC DC-

Load

-48V

-48V IN

Switch

FUSE FUSE

PWR SW #0

FET Switch PWR SW #1

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 101

Revision 4.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-46.

Figure 2-46 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM/ISWM

PWR SW#0

PWR SW#1

P-ON

ALM

-48V in Fuse

(125V AC/DC 15A)

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 102

Revision 4.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

P-ON Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

ALM Red Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW ON ×The card supplies the operating power to various circuit

cards.

OFF

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

01 SW -48 V operating power is supplied to

various circuit cards.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 103

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT.

The TSW capacity is 2048×2048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IMX

configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port

Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.

Figure 2-47 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System

[Connection diagram of the TSW]

MUX

CPR

LC/TRK

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

[Function block diagram]

PLO

MUX

LVDS

CFT

From EMA

TSW

INT

MUSIC

DTI DCS

MUX

LC/TRK

PH-SW10

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 104

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-48 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).

Figure 2-48 PLO Function Diagram

When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required,

and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (±0.3ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When

the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (±5ppm deviation) can be the

base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the

digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another

clock source automatically in the order of:

1DCS0

2. DCS1

3. DIU0

4. DIU1

5. DIU2

6. DIU3

7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator

TSW#1

(PH-SW10

)

TSW#0 (PH-SW10)

TSW

PLO

OSC#1 (PA-CK14)

OSC#0 (PA-CK14)

DCS 0 DCS 1

DCS 1

DCS 0

DIU 0

DIU 1

DIU 2

DIU 3

Multiple connection on MDF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 105

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768MHz CLK

•8KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH (for wireless module).

The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it

sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3.

This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The

TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the

EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a

tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down

connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.)

Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight

(8) circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.

Figure 2-49 Voice Prompting

[Voice Prompt sending for Tone] [Voice Prompt sending for Music]

Speech Path MemorySpeech Path Memory

TONE ROM MUSIC from EMA

Tone source selected by office data Music source selected by office data

[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory]

[SPM for music channel 16-29]

MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5

[SPM for music channel 0-15]

MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 16-31]

MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 0-15]

MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM0

Tone Music

Note

Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 106

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in PIM0 in the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown below.

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

PIM0

TSW #1

TSW #0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW11

TSWACT

MUXACT

PLOACT

TSWMBR

PLOMB

M3SY

M2SY

M1SY

M0SY

CFT

SYNC

ICK

ECK

SW03

SW04

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

PMCA

PMJ

PMN

SW12

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 107

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT

Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

MUXACT Green Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state.

PLOACT Green Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state.

M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY Green Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY Green Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY Green Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established.

PMCA Red Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred.

CFT Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

PMJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure

•8 KHz output FH failure

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Both internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm

deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office

PMN Yellow

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm) failure

•High-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm) failure

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 108

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when any of the following have occurred.

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure

ICK Green

Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally.

Note: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is

operational.

ECK Green

Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card (PA-

CK14).

Note: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSWMBR UP TSW Make-busy request.

DOWN ×TSW Make-busy request cancel.

PLOMBR UP PLO Make-busy request.

DOWN ×PLO Make-busy request cancel.

SW12 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.”

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 109

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Note: When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a con-

nection to TSW (Don’t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED

is not lit. In the case of this mode, only SW03 is valid.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW03

1ON 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid.

OFF 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid.

2ON Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.

OFF ×Setting of µ-law in the CFT function block.

3OFF ×Fixed.

ON Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM

1/2/3). Note

OFF ×TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted

in PIM 0).

SW04

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 110

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.

OFF PLO operates as the clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64KHz + 8KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64KHz + 8KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card.

OFF This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)

card.

7ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE”)

OFF ×(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF”)

8OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 111

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is used in “clock subordinate office”, clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be

extracted. See Figure 2-52 for more information. When this circuit card is used in “clock source office”

cable connections are not necessary.

Figure 2-51 PLO Connector Leads Location

DCSB0

DIU0B0

DIU1B0

DIU2B0

DIU3B0

SYN0B0

SYN1B0

DCSB1

DIU0B1

DIU1B1

DIU2B1

DIU3B1

SYN0B1

SYN1B1

DCSA0

DIU0A0

DIU1A0

DIU2A0

DIU3A0

SYN0A0

SYN1A0

DCSA1

DIU0A1

DIU1A1

DIU2A1

DIU3A1

SYN0A1

SYN1A1

Mounting Module

PIM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 112

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-52 Connecting Route Diagram

DCS

TSW #1

TSW #0

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

DCSA0

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DCSA1

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

PBX MDF

Note: The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).

DIU3B0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 113

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10

TDSW

MUX

#0 MUX

MUX

TDSW

MT24 TDSW CA-180

MT24 TDSW CA-140

MT24 TDSW CA-90

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 114

Revision 4.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSWMBR

PLOMB

SW03

SW04

SW11

SW12

1234ON

1234 ON

5678

1234ON

5678

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 115

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW

card is capable of 8192 × 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards

allow 8192 × 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration.

The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port Microprocessor

(PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.

Figure 2-54 TSW Configuration

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

[TSW configuration]

[INT configuration]

CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 GT1

CPU0(LP) ISAGT0 GT0

TSW1

(INT)

TSW0

(INT)

MUX01

MUX30

MUX31

MUX00 LC/TRK(PM)

LC/TRK(PM)

ISA BUS I/O BUS

System #1

System #0

ACT

STBY

ACT ACT

ACT

PM BUS

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 116

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring

Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is

located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card.

Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of

PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.

Figure 2-55 Music/Tone Insertion

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 117

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-56 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IMX-U system accommodates two

TSWMs (TSWM0/1).

PIM 3

[SPM for music channel 16-29]

MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5

PIM 2

[SPM for music channel 0-15]

MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

PIM 1

[SPM for tone channel 16-31]

MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

PIM0

[SPM for tone channel 0-15]

MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

Note :

Note

MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 10

TSW 11

TSW 12

TSW 13

TSWM

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 118

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

The definition of the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below.

•4-IMG System

•IMX-U system

This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IMX-U system.

•For the card in TSWM0

•For the card in TSWM1

SYMBOL SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

IMG 0

TSW01 IMG 1

TSW02 IMG 2

TSW03 IMG 3

TSW10

IMG 0

TSW11 IMG 1

TSW12 IMG 2

TSW13 IMG 3

SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

Collects the PCM data IMG 0

TSW01 IMG 1

TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 0

TSW03 IMG 1

TSW10

Collects the PCM data IMG 0

TSW11 IMG 1

TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 0

TSW13 IMG 1

SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

Collects the PCM data IMG 2

TSW01 IMG 3

TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 2

TSW03 IMG 3

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 119

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below.

Figure 2-57 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)

TSW10

Collects the PCM data IMG 2

TSW11 IMG 3

TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 2

TSW13 IMG 3

SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG

TSWMBR

TSWACT

M3SY

M2SY

M1SY

M0SY

PLO 1

PLO 0

TONE

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 120

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT

Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY Green Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established.

PLO 1 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1.

PLO 0 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSWMBR UP TSW Make-busy request.

DOWN ×TSW Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

TONE

1OFF ×Fixed.

2ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE.”)

OFF ×(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF.”)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 121

Revision 4.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSWMBR

TONE

1 2 ON

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 122

Revision 4.0

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

The PU-SW00 circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the IMX-U

system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PU-SW00 cards and two PU-

SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS) switching for four (4) LNs. This circuit

card is located in ISWM of the ISW.

Figure 2-58 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (1/2)

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

TSW Configuration

2M PCM HW x8

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32M SERIAL HW

64KHz

Clock

64KHz

Clock

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 123

Revision 4.0

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-59 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (2/2)

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

ISWR

TSW (00)

TSW (01)

TSW (02)

TSW (03)

TSW (10)

TSW (11)

TSW (12)

TSW (13)

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 124

Revision 4.0

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-60.

Figure 2-60 Face Layout of PU-SW00 (TSW)

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT Green Lights when the TDSW block is active.

Red Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state.

PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

HCKALM Red Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card.

LN33 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN32 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN31 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN30 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

TSW MB

TSW MBR

TSWACT

1234

PWPALM

HCKALM

LN33

LN32

LN31

LN30

LN23

LN22

LN21

LN20

LN13

LN12

LN11

LN10

LN03

LN02

LN01

LN00

SWE5

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 125

Revision 4.0

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

LN23 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN22 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN21 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN20 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN13 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN12 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN11 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN10 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN03 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN02 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN01 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

LN00 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

TSW MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSW MBR UP Circuit card Make-busy request.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWE5

1ON ×Local Node connection mode.

OFF MUX connection mode.

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

4OFF ×Not used

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 126

Revision 4.0

PU-SW00

Time Division Switch

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSW MB

TSW MBR

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 127

Revision 4.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

1. General Function

The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IMX-U system, supports the following functions.

(a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the

space division is composed with this circuit card.

(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one

card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.

Figure 2-61 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (1/2)

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

2M PCM HW x8

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32M SERIAL HW

64KHz

Clock

64KHz

Clock

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock

TSW Configuration

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 128

Revision 4.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

Figure 2-61 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (2/2)

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 129

Revision 4.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW. The mounted slots are the shaded parts shown

below.

3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-62.

Figure 2-62 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Mounting Module

ISWM

HSW (00)

HSW (01)

HSW (10)

HSW (11)

HSWACT

PWRALM

CKALF

CKALE

CKALD

CKALC

CKALB

CKALA

CKAL9

CKAL8

CKAL7

CKAL6

CKAL5

CKAL4

CKAL3

CKAL2

CKAL1

CKAL0

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 130

Revision 4.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

HSWACT Green Lights when the HSW block is active.

Red Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state.

PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

CKALF Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKALE Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKALD Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKALC Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKALB Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKALA Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL9 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL8 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL7 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL6 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL5 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL4 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISW.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 131

Revision 4.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

CKAL3 Green Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL2 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL1 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISW.

CKAL0 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISW.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISW.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 132

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the

TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR

to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this

circuit card onto the CPR.

Figure 2-63 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PLO0

PLO1

TSW03

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

DLKC0

MISC

ISAGT

DSP

CPULANI

LANI

TSW10

CPR #0

To HUB

ISAGT

DLKC1

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

MISC I/O Bus MISC I/O Bus

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 133

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

Figure 2-64 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IMX-U System (ISW)

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown below.

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

(IOGT1)

PH-GT10

(IOGT0)

PH-GT10

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

LPM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 134

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors is shown Figure 2-65. Neither lamps nor switches are located on this circuit

card.

Figure 2-65 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

4. External Interface

This card has no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

ISA BUS INTERFACE

FRONT VIEW

PWG

DSPP

CONN

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 135

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which

permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industrial Standard

Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.

Figure 2-66 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

DSP

CPU

LANI

CPR#0

DSP

ISAGT CPU LANI

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

TSW TSW

To HUB To HUB

I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

CPR#1

MISC Bus MISC Bus

ISAGT

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 136

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown below.

PZ-GT16 (GT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

LPM

Mounting Module

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 137

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-67. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.

Figure 2-67 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

4. Lamp Indications

This card contains no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

ISA BUS INTERFACE

FRONT VIEW

PWG

DSPP

CONN

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 138

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus

located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW,

MUX cards of IMG2, 3 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used for the IMX-U

system.

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

CPU#0 CPU#1

EMA

PH-GT09

(IOGT1)

PH-GT09

(IOGT0)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT20

(ISAGT) PZ-GT20

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

ISA BUS

LPM (IMG0)

GT-BUS

TSWM#1 (IMG2)

TSWM#0 (IMG1)

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

CLK 1

CLK 0

PH-GT09

(IOGT1)

PH-GT09

(IOGT0)

TSW I/O BUS

IOC/MISC

MISC

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 139

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-69. Neither lamps nor switches are located on this cir-

cuit card.

Figure 2-69 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

LPM(IMG0)

Mounting Module

ISA BUS INTERFACE

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 140

Revision 4.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

4. External Interface

This card contains no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 141

Revision 4.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

1. General Function

The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component

Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or

Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).

Figure 2-70 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)

To another Fusion Node

FCCHDTIDTIFCCH

HUB

LANI

LANI CPUISAGT

ISAGT

LANI

DSPDSP

CPR #1CPR #0

NIC

MAT

PCI

10-BASE-T

CPU

IMX

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 142

Revision 4.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-71.

Figure 2-71 Face Layout of PZ-PC19

Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

10 BASE-T

EST3

EST2

EST1

EST0

PCI BUS INTERFACE

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2

Page 143

Revision 4.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

EST0 Green Layer 1 link has established.

EST1 Green Data packet sending/receiving.

EST2 Red Layer 1 link failure.

EST3 Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.

CHAPTER 2 ND-70182 (E)

Page 144

Revision 4.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

6. External Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

24DTR

CN2

FCH

PZ-PC19(LANI)

HUB

10 BASE-T straight Cable10 BASE-T straight Cable

TO IMX MAT

10 BASE-T straight Cable

HUB

10AL (10)FLT CA

DTI

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 145

Revision 4.0

CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

1. General

This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards.

•General Function

Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card.

•Mounting Location/Condition

Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there

are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

•Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face

layout.

•Lamp Indications

Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

•Switch Settings

Each circuit card’s switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard

setting, etc.

• External Interface

If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting

slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are

provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector

lead locations and the connecting routes are shown.

In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 146

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of

a maximum of eight parties.

A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an

answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a

C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal

and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time.

The card adopts “N-1 addition” method for establishing a conference.

Note: This circuit card is used for following features:

•Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [S-56]

•Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [A-2]

•Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [A-121]

•Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System

NETWORK

Answer/Release Signal →

Conferee

Conference

Originator

CPU

Local I/O Bus

INT SW INT PA-CFTB

PCM INT

VPROC

PCM INT: PCM Interface

VPROC: Voice Processor Block

TLT

This diagram shows an example of a “Preset” conference involving Tie Line connections.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 147

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 148

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP

NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL0

BL7

Red BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.

OPE

N-OPE

SW2

SW1

SW0

BL7

BL0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 149

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

2ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

3ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

4ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

5ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

6ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

7ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

8ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

12345678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 150

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1

1ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

2ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

3ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

4ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

5ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

6ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

7ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

8ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

SW2

1ON ×

-law PCM encoder

OFF A-law PCM encoder

2ON Conference connection is set up by PB tel.

OFF Conference connection is not set up by PB tel.

ON When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388,

SP-457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114.

OFF When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519,

SP-1141.

4OFF×Not used

5OFF×Not used

6OFF×Not used

12345678

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 151

Revision 4.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

6. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW2

ON CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting

OFF

MODULE SLOT

NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW0

SW1

SW2

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW2-7 SW2-8 PAD [dB]

OFF OFF 0

OFF ON 3

ON OFF 6

ON ON 9

12345678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 152

Revision 4.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

PA-CK14

Oscillator

1. General Function

The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source

clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is

a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (±5 ppm

deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clock-

source-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (±0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is

mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System

SEL

TDSW

MUX0

PLO

SEL

TDSW

MUX0

PLO

BWBBWB

BWB BWB

OSCOSC

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DSC 0 DSC 1

FRONT CABLES FRONT CABLES

MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 MUX1 MUX2 MUX3

LC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRK

DSC1

DSC0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 153

Revision 4.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in PIM0. The card mounted in Slot 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for

the secondary OSC.

Note: This card occupies two slots.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below.

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

OSC#0

OSC#1

PIM0

CLKOUT 0

CLKOUT 1

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 154

Revision 4.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of

PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

CLKOUT0 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0.

CLKOUT1 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 155

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization

with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital

network. As seen in the figure below, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network

selection.

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System

TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03

SEL

PLL PLL

PLO #0 PLO #1

OSC OSC

TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13

SEL

34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A

MDF

BWB BWB

BWBBWB

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DCS 0

DCS 1

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 156

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface

clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source

automatically in the order of:

1. DCS

2. DIU0

3. DIU1

4. DIU2

5. DIU3

6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 157

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit

card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for

the external hold tone source.

Figure 3-6 Music Source

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 158

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below.

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)

Mounting Module

TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO 0

PLO 1

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW8F

SWAC

SWAB

ACT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 159

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure

•8 KHz output FH failure

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock

source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when either of the following has occurred:

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1."

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 160

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply

routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)

card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16

WCS) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

8 OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 161

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

SWAC 1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2OFF ×Not used

SW8F

SW8F-1 SW8F-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 162

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWAB

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Not used OFF ON Buzzer

Not used ON OFF Chime

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 163

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1

connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

PLO #1

PLO #0

26 1

FM 1

27 2

FM 0

28 3

SYN 1B

29 4

SYN 0B

30 5

DIU 3B

SYN 1A

31 6

DIU 2B

SYN 0A

32 7

DIU 1B

DIU 3A

33 8

DIU 0B

DIU 2A

34 9

DCS B

DIU 1A

35 10 DIU 0A

36 11 DCS A

37 12

38 13

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

TSWM

REAR VIEW

34PH EXCLK

CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

Installation Cable

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Mounting Module TSWM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 164

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DCSA1

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DCSA0

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

PLO #0

PLO #1

DCS

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

MDFPBX

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 165

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

SW02

SW03

SWAC

SW8F

SWAB

12 3 4ON

5678

12 3 4 ON

5678

12ON

1234ON

12 3 4 ON

5678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 166

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization.

With this circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in the

figure below, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. This circuit

card is used for the IMX-U system.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 167

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO)

LN0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3

(IMG2/IMG3)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISW

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN DTI from

LN DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN3

(IMG0/IMG1)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 168

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

Mounting Module

TSWM0 (IMG1)

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 169

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW11

SW10

SW12

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

CKPKG

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

1234567812345678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 170

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC

(±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG

Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0

Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1

Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1."

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 171

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Note: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IMX-U system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI)

according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

Note

1ON × Note 1 Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS sig-

nals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF × Note 1 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF ×When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on

outputting the current phase clock.

ON × Note 1 T h i s c i r c u i t c a r d i

s associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16

WCS) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

8OFF ×Fixed OFF (Not used).

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 172

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Note: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISW is used. The DTI

clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02

Note

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.

SW10

1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2ON CLK card is not used.

OFF CLK card is used.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 173

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

SW12

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit

card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SW11-1 SW11-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW11-3 SW11-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Not Used ON OFF Buzzer

Not Used OFF ON Chime

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 174

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

•LT cable connectors

Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Figure 3-12 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

TSW

Front View

TSWM

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Backplane

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 175

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU

leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high)

➝

DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-12 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

REAR VIEW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

MDF

Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

Front View

ISWM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 176

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•LT cable connectors

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK! on the ISWM backplane.

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2)

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU

leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high)

➝

DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (2/2)

EXCLK1 EXCLK0

Backplane

ISWM

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Installation Cable

ISWM EXCLK0

(Slot No.09)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.13)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Rear View 26

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 177

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wiring at the MDF. Figure 3-14 shows an example of a system that has the PLO cards

in dual configuration.

Figure 3-14 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External

High-Stability Oscillator

MDF

ISW

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

PCM Cable(IP)

DCSA

DCSB

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK1 DCSB

DCSA

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

BASEU

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 178

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-15 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN. This example assumes that

the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

MDF

ISW

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

Installation Cable

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable RA

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

LT Connector

Digital

Interface

EXCLK1

PLO#1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

Note 1:

Note 1

Note 2

PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx

leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 179

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-16 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0)

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

FM1

FM0

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

36 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

Note: For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-17.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 180

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-17 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-17 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

POUT A

POUT B

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

Note 1:

Note 2

Note 1

PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

MDF

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Installation Cable

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

Digital

Interface

IMG1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 181

Revision 4.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-18 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW10

SW11

SW12

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Pin Assignment

No.

LEAD

NAME

FM1

FM0

LEAD

NAME

No.

MUSIC

SOURCE

MDF

ISW-LN PLO CA-A/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and

Installation Cable(25 P)

Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1

are required on the MDF.

Note

Note: FM1 is not used.

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234 ON

56 7 8

12ON

1ON

234

1234 ON

56 7 8

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 182

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization

with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system

can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-19, the PLO can be redundant re-

gardless of the system switching network selection.

Figure 3-19 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System

TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03

SEL

PLL PLL

PLO #0 PLO #1

OSC OSC

TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13

SEL

34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A

MDF

BWB BWB

BWBBWB

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DCS 0

DCS 1

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 183

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface

clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automat-

ically in the order of:

1. DCS

2. DIU0

3. DIU1

4. DIU2

5. DIU3

6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 184

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit

card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for

the external hold tone source.

Figure 3-20 Music Source

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 185

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM

PLO 0

PLO 1

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW06

SW05

SW04

ACT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 186

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office.

•32.768 MHz output clock failure.

•8 KHz output FH failure.

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure.

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card).

•Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the

clock source office.

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed.

•Drifting failure.

•Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) failure.

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when either of the following has occurred.

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 187

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS sig-

nals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK11)

card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

8OFF ×Not used

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 188

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

SW05 1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2OFF Not used

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW06

SW8F-1 SW8F-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 189

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

SW04

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Not Used OFF ON Buzzer

Not Used ON OFF Chime

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 190

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1

connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Figure 3-22 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

PLO #1

PLO #0

26 1

FM 1

27 2

FM 0

28 3

SYN 1B

29 4

SYN 0B

30 5

DIU 3B

SYN 1A

31 6

DIU 2B

SYN 0A

32 7

DIU 1B

DIU 3A

33 8

DIU 0B

DIU 2A

34 9

DCS B

DIU 1A

35 10 DIU 0A

36 11 DCS A

37 12

38 13

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

TSWM

REAR VIEW

34PH EXCLK

CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

Installation Cable

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Mounting Module TSWM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 191

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-23 Connecting Route Diagram

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DCSA1

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DCSA0

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

PLO #0

PLO #1

DCS

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

MDFPBX

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 192

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW05

SW06

SW04

12 3 4 ON

5678

1234ON

5678

12ON

1234 ON

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 193

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization

between networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system

containing this circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in the figure below,

the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. This circuit card is used

for the IMX-U system.

Figure 3-24 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO)

LN0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3

(IMG2/IMG3)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISW

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN DTI from

LN DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN3

(IMG0/IMG1)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 194

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

Mounting Module

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

Mounting Module

TSWM0 (IMG1)

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 195

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-25

Figure 3-25 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW11

SW10

SW12

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW01

SW02

SW03

1234567812345678

SYNC

ICK

CKPKG

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 196

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the

clock source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG

Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0

Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1

Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 197

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IMX-U system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI)

according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

Note 1

1ON × Note 1 Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF × Note 1 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF × When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

6ON × Note 1 This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

8 OFF ×Fixed OFF (Not used).

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 198

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Note: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system, DCS clock from the ISW is used. The DTI clock

can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02

Note

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.

SW10

1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2ON CLK card is not used.

OFF ×CLK card is used.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 199

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

SW12

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit

card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SW11-1 SW11-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW11-3 SW11-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Not Used ON OFF Buzzer

Not Used OFF ON Chime

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 200

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

•LT cable connectors

Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Figure 3-26 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

TSW

Front View

TSWM

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Backplane

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 201

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU

leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high)

➝

DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-26 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

REAR VIEW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

MDF

Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

Front View

ISWM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 202

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•LT cable connectors

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK! on the ISWM backplane.

Figure 3-27 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2)

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU

leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high)

➝

DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-27 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (2/2)

EXCLK1 EXCLK0

Backplane

ISWM

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Installation Cable

ISWM EXCLK0

(Slot No.09)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.13)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Rear View 26

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 203

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example of a system

that has the PLO cards in dual configuration. Figure 3-28 is a cable connection diagram (ISW) for accepting

synchronization clocks from an external high-stability oscillator.

Figure 3-28 Cable Connection (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External Oscillator

MDF

ISW

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

PCM Cable(IP)

DCSA

DCSB

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK1 DCSB

DCSA

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

BASEU

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 204

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

This figure shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN. This example assumes that

the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-29 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

MDF

ISW

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

Installation Cable

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable RA

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

LT Connector

Digital

Interface

EXCLK1

PLO#1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

Note 1:

Note 1

Note 2

PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx

leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 205

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-30 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0)

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

FM1

FM0

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

35 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 206

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

POUT A

POUT B

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

Note 1:

Note 2

Note 1

PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

MDF

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Installation Cable

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

Digital

Interface

IMG1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 207

Revision 4.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-32 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW10

SW11

SW12

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Pin Assignment

No.

LEAD

NAME

FM1

FM0

LEAD

NAME

No.

MUSIC

SOURCE

MDF

ISW-LN PLO CA-A /

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and

Installation Cable(25P)

Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1

are required on the MDF.

Note

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

1234ON

5678

12 3 4ON

56 7 8

1 2 ON

1ON

2 3 4

12 3 4ON

5678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 208

Revision 4.0

PH-CK18

Clock

PH-CK18

Clock

1. General Function

This circuit card is used for the Local Node of the IMX-U system. The main function of this circuit card is

to supply basic clock signals to the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator

(PLO) located in TSWM0 of IMG1, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW)

located in TSWM1 of IMG2.

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH (for Wireless System)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 209

Revision 4.0

PH-CK18

Clock

Figure 3-33 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK)

LN0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3

(IMG2/IMG3)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISW

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN DTI from

LN DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN3

(IMG0/IMG1)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 210

Revision 4.0

PH-CK18

Clock

2. Mounting Location/Condition

Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM1 (IMG2)

CLK (#1)

CLK (#0)

OPE

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 211

Revision 4.0

PH-CK18

Clock

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.

LAMP COLOR MEANING

OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

ALM 0 Red Lights when clock signal failure has occurred.

ALM 1 Red Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred.

PALM Red Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Circuit card Make-busy.

OFF ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 212

Revision 4.0

PH-CK18

Clock

6. External Interface

Figure 3-35 LT Connector Lead Location (ISW-LN0)

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

35 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 213

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface

function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling

of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending

of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination

Information) link interface function, etc.

Figure 3-36 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card in the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.

CPU GT

TDSW

MUX

2M PCM Highway

PM Bus

ATTENDANT

CONSOLE (×2)

: Control Line

: Speech Path

IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus

PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

HMATI

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

HMATI

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 214

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Face Layout of HMATI Card

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Note: The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.

OPE

N-OPE

FU0 (Note)

SW11

BLS1

BLA1

BLA0

SW04

SW03

SW02

SW08

SW07

SW09

SW12

FU1 (Note)

BLS0

Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.

➀

MB key

→

➁

Remove the FU0 and FU1.

➂

Extract this card.

➀

Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1.

➁

Plug in the FU0 and FU1.

➂

MB key

→

OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 215

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW02 (TAS0)

SW03 (TAS1)

SW04

1ON ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

SW07 (TAS0)

SW08 (TAS1)

LAMP COLOR STATE

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)

1-48VG

2CRG

3GG

4 LOOP LOOP

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE

SW7-1/

SW8-1 SW7-2/

SW8-2 SW7-3/

SW8-3 SW7-4/

SW8-4 RESISTANCE

OFF

0 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

200 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

390 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

590 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

820 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

1020 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

1210 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

1410 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 216

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

Note: When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX

114, b7 = I.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON

OFF ×Fixed

2ON

OFF ×Fixed

3ON

OFF ×Fixed

4ON

OFF ×Fixed

SW12

1ON ×

Fixed (all ON).

OFF

2ON ×

OFF

3ON ×

OFF

4ON ×

OFF

SW9

0ON No. 0 System is in Make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting.

1ON No. 1 System is in Make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 217

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4

LT5

1915

1814

1713

1612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HMATI

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

50 24

LT5, 11 Connecter

(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)

TAS 0A0

TAS 1A0

TAS 0B0

TAS 1B0

LT11

HMATI

Mounting Module

PIM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 218

Revision 4.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MB UP: Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW07

SW08

SW09 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used.

SW11

SW12

1234

1 2 3 4

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

No. 0

OFF

(Piano Switch)

1 2 3 4

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 219

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two

sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.

Figure 3-39 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

MUX

CPR

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

LC/TRK ATI

DESK

CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 220

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ATI

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

SW00

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW17

SW16

SW11 SW14

SW10

SW12 SW15

SW13

PALM

BLA1

BLA0

SW01

BLS1

BLS0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 221

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally.

OFF Off when circuit card is not operating.

PALM Red Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred.

OFF Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on

the Desk Console).

Flash

(60 IPM) Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns on PA lamp on

the Desk console).

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.

Flash

(60 IPM) Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select

signals are being transmitted.

OFF Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00 UP Circuit card is Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 222

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

0ON ×Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console.

OFF Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.

1ON ×Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console.

OFF Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

SW10

(TAS#0)

SW13

(TAS#1)

SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively.

4This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/

15.

SW11/

SW12

(TAS#0)

SW14/

SW15

(TAS#1)

SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4

(TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1).

SW10-3/

SW13-3 SW10-2/

SW13-2 SW10-1/

SW13-1 STANDARD

SETTING RESISTANCE

ON ON ON 0 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

ON ON OFF 220 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

ON OFF ON 398 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

ON OFF OFF 618 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

OFF ON ON 800 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

OFF ON OFF 1020 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

OFF OFF ON 1198 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

OFF OFF OFF ×1418 Ω

ΩΩ

Ω

SW12/

SW15 SW11/

SW14 SW10-4/

SW13-4 STANDARD

SETTING

SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED

TAS 0A/

TAS 1A TAS 0B/

TAS 1B

ON ON ON CR G

OFF ON ON -48V G

OFF OFF OFF ×LOOP LOOP

OFF OFF ON G G

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 223

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Note: DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card initializa-

tion, regardless of the mode before the initialization.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW16

For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel

application, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.

2ON Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available.

OFF Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.

3SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as showing below.

6ON A-law PCM coding.

OFF ×µ-law PCM coding.

7 Refer to SW16-1.

8OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF).

SW17

1ON Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals.

OFF ×PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission.

2ON ×Fixed to ON.

Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6.

5~7 OFF ×Fixed to OFF.

Note ON Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization.

OFF ×Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.

Desk Console

Key pattern

to be used

SW16-1 SW16-7 SYS 1 INDEX 160

Bit 1 Bit 0

Hotel type ON ON 1 1

OFF 0 1

Business type OFF ON —1

OFF —0

SW16-5 SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY

ON ON OFF NORTH AMERICA

ON OFF ON AUSTRALIA

Other combinations Not used

SW17-3 SW17-4 SYS 1 INDEX 6

Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4

OFF OFF 0 0 0

ON OFF 0 0 1

OFF ON 0 1 0

ON ON 1 0 0

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 224

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

Mounting Module

PIM

BN4800 BN4801

BN4820 BN4821

BN4830 BN4831

BN4810 BN4811

LT5, 11 connector

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23

14 18 22 14 18 22

00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21 00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21

12 16 20 12 16 20

LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT 5

Slot No.

Group No.

ATI

PIM

LT11

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10

#0 ADD ON

MODULE

#1 ADD ON

MODULE

BN4800 - 48v

BN4801 - 48v

BN4810 - 48v

BN4811 - 48v

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

BN4820 - 48v

BN4821 - 48v

BN4830 - 48v

BN4831 - 48v

Note: The lead for each

DESK CONSOLE is

shown below.

Note: The lead for each ADD

ON CONSOLE is

shown below.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 225

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Figure 3-42 Connecting Route Diagram

Note: The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is

supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.

ATI

BN4820

BN4821

BN4830

BN4831

BN4830

BN4831

GND

BN4820

BN4821

GND

PBX

Installation

Cable

MDF IDF 6-PIN MODULAR

ROSETTE

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

6-PIN MODULAR

CABLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

GND

(PZ-M377)

(-48V)

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 226

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Figure 3-43 shows how to connect Desk Console.

Figure 3-43 Desk Console Connection

Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between

the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.

Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65 φ Cable

PBX 1,148 ft. (350 m) 1,640 ft. (500 m)

Local Power Supply 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m)

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.

Bottom View

DESK CONSOLE

PAG E

(8-core) LINE

(6-core)

REC

(8-core)

6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF

DESK CONSOLE

Transformer Surge

Protection

DC/DC

Convertor

GND

–48V/–24V

Desk Console

Modular Jack 6-core Modular Cable

No.

LEAD

NAME PIN

No.

LEAD

NAME

BN4800

BN4820

BN4810

BN4830

BN4801

BN4821

BN4811

BN4831

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

B1 A1

GND

- 48 V

GND

- 48 V

B2 A2 Add-on for

Console 0

Console 1

Add-on for

Note: GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 227

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

If the distance exceeds above, estimate it according to the calculations shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console

BN4830

BN4831

GND

BN4830

BN4831

BN4820

BN4821

BN4820

BN4821

GND

ATI

PBX

GND

(PZ-M377)

Installation

Cable MDF IDF

(-48V)

6-pin Modular

rosette

6-pin Modular

Cable

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 228

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power

supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26

Ω

as shown in the following

formula:

m = a + b + c 26

Ω

m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A

b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B

c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C

Example of Calculation

a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:

Note: You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths in

feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of

length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

u (Ω/m) × x (m) u (Ω/m) × x (m)

a = +

No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

v (Ω/m) × y (m) v (Ω/m) × y (m)

b = +

No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

w (Ω/m) × z (m) w (Ω/m) × z (m)

c = +

No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables

u : DC resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)

v : DC resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)

w : DC resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)

x : Cable length (m) in the range of A

y : Cable length (m) in the range of B

z : Cable length (m) in the range of C

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 229

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

Mounting Module

PIM

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4

LT5

1915

1814

1713

1612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

ATI

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

LT11

ATI

50 24

TAS1A

TAS0A

TAS1B

TAS0B

LT5, 11 connector

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 230

Revision 4.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW00

SW01

SW10 (TAS #0)

SW13 (TAS #1)

SW11 (TAS #0)

SW12 (TAS #0)

SW14 (TAS #1)

SW15 (TAS #1)

SW16

SW17

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234ON

56 7 8

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 231

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and

the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter

Dial Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, momentary open/reverse battery function

is provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System

max. 1200 [Ω]

COT

INT SW

Local I/O Bus

(PA-16LCBW)

C. O. line

Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of

terminal Resistance)

Open Function: x 15 circuits

Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable)

Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)

Encoding Law: µ-law

•

PUBLIC

NETWORK

Analog Terminal

CPU

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 232

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

OPE

BL15

BL0

SW00 (MB)

SW10

SW16

SW11

SW14

SW17

SW18

SW15

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 233

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME LAMP

COLOR LAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in

synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with

the dial pulses coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 234

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω.

(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

ON Circuit card make-busy

OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel

(normal operating mode)

SW10

(BNW0-7) Balancing Net-

work Designation

• Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to circuit

#0-#7.

North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A) (Note)

for long distance.

OFF North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW: 600 Ω (Note)

for short distance

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

350 1000

0.21

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B)

600

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 235

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

SWITCH SWITCH

No. FUNCTION SWITCH

SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15) Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element on this

switch corresponds

to Circuit #8-#15.

(This same as previous page)

SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 ON Fixed to ON

3OFFFixed to OFF

4OFFFixed to OFF

SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3OFFFixed to OFF

4OFFFixed to OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 236

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH

SETTING MEANING

SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3Message Waiting

Lamp

ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing

(Selected and Controlled by Software)

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW18

Polarity reverse or

Momentary Open

(Circuit #15 Only)

ON Momentary open

OFF Polarity reverse

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

Slide switch

(RVS) (OPEN)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 237

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) Note: Normal operating mode is down.

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

(RVS) (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 238

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

7. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram.

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

121 21 2 1 21 21 2

PIM

Mounting Module

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 239

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 240

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

Figure 3-49 Connecting Route Diagram

PBX MDF

Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [W] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 241

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and

the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter

Dial Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for 16

channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.

Figure 3-50 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

max. 1200 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

COT

RST

TSW/INT

(PA-8RSTY)

CPU GT

Local I/O Bus

(PA-16LCBY)

C. O. LINE

• Loop Resistance : Max 1200[Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

• Reverse Function : x 16 circuits

• Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)

• Encoding Law : A-law/µ-law

PUBLIC

NETWORK

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 242

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card

OPE

BL15

BL0

SW00

(MB)

SW10

(BNW0-7) SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW19

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 243

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.

LAMP NAME LAMP

COLOR LAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing

in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing

with the dial pulses coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

ON Circuit card make-busy

OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel

(normal operating mode)

SW10

(BNW0-7) Balancing Net-

work Designation

• Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to Circuit

#0-#7.

When this switch

has been set, see

SW14.

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464B) (Note)

for long distance

OFF

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW: 600 Ω (Note)

for short distance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 244

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15) Balancing Network

Designation

•Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to Circuit #8-

#15.

[the same as previous page]

SW14

Selection of the User

SW14

-1 SW14

-2 SW14

-3 SW14

-4 User

OFF ON OFF OFF North America

Other Country (µ-Law)

OFF OFF ON OFF Other Country (A-Law)

OFF ON ON OFF Australia

OFF OFF OFF ON Brazil

OFF OFF ON ON China

SW15

North America

Brazil

China

Other Country

OFF Fixed to OFF

PAD

(Australia Only)

ON NEAX 2400 PAD

PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB

OFF ICS-PBX PAD

PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB

2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 245

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω.

(For North America, Other Country (A/µ Law))

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH

SETTING MEANING

SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2OFF

Fixed to OFF

3OFF

Fixed to OFF

4OFF

Fixed to OFF

SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2OFF

Fixed to OFF

Message Waiting

Lamp ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing

(Selected and Controlled by Software)

4OFF

Fixed to OFF

SW19 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2OFF

Fixed to OFF

3ON

Fixed to ON

4OFF

Fixed to OFF

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

350 1000

0.21

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B)

600

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 246

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

SWITCH SETTING SHEET

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) Note: Normal operating mode is down.

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW19

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 247

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown below.

When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.

Figure 3-52 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

121 21 2 1 21 21 2

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 248

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

Figure 3-52 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 249

Revision 4.0

PA-16LCBY

7. Connecting Route Diagram

Figure 3-53 Connecting Route Diagram

PBX MDF

Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [W] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 250

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

1. General Function

The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the Dterm and the IMX. Depending on

the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.

•16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card (voice communications

only).

•8 DLC mode: A maximum of 8 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card (simultaneous voice and

data communications).

Figure 3-54 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System

There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP-

3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for Dterm Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ

PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the Dterm performance depending

on each firmware EPROM.

Table 3-1 Performance

FIRMWARE Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III

SP-3295

16ELC J

PROG-B

•24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

•Month and year displays following the time and date.

•Software keys are available and the software keys are con-

trolled by the system. Thus, key function data can be

changed by office data.

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

SP-3270

16ELC J

PROG-A

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software keys are available. However, key function is

fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

term #0

DTE

Data Adapter

term #7

DTE

Data Adapter

term #0

term #15

IMX IMX

16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE

ELC

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 251

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-55 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

PALM

SW00 (MB)

BL15

OPE

BL0

SW01

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 252

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.

i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the PA-

16ELCJ card whose PALM is on.

ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.

iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least 1 minute.

iv) Connect the Dterm again.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

PALM Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

BL0

BL15

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been

assigned.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 253

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00 (MB)

Circuit Card

Make-busy key

Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit card Make-busy.

SW01

See Table 3-2 below.

—Always ON (fixed).

7ELC/DLC

mode

Designation

16ELC mode.

8DLC mode.

Table 3-2 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7

ON OFF

ON •16 sets of Dterms per card.

•Voice Communication only.

•8 sets of Dterms per card.

•Data Adapter is used.

OFF

•16 sets of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the

same time.

•8 sets of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

12345678

1ON

2345678

OFF

1ON

2 3 456 7 8

OFF

12 3 456 7 8 ON

OFF

12 3 4 5 6 7 8ON

OFF

SW01-7

SW01-1

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 254

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

6. External Interface

Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT

connectors as follows.

•6ELC mode

Figure 3-56 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode)

Mounting Module

PIM

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in

①

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in

②

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

②① ②①① ② ①②①②①②

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 255

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

•16ELC mode

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode)

Mounting Module

PIM

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in

③

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

③ ③ ③ ③ ③③

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 256

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW01

12345678ON

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 257

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between Dterm and IMX. Depending upon the

switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.

•16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications

only)

•8 DLC mode: A maximum of 8 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and

data communications)

Figure 3-58 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System

Table 3-3 Performance

Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III

•24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

•Month and year displays following the time and date.

•Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the

system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data.

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

Dterm #0

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #7

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #0

Dterm #15

IMX IMX

16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE

ELC

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 258

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-59.

Figure 3-59 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PALM

SW00 (MB)

BL15

OPE

SW10 SW11

BL0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 259

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.

i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit as to all lines which belong to the

PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on.

ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.

iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the jack, then leave it disconnected for at least 1 minute.

iv) Connect the Dterm again.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

PALM Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

BL0

BL15

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been

assigned.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 260

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.

Note: When using firmware SP-3419, set SW10-1=OFF, SW10-2=ON.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00 (MB) Circuit Card Make-

busy key Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit Card Make-busy.

SW10

1-2

LP-PM

Interface mode

setting/Group

No. setting

Note

In case of this circuit card is used from No. 0 to

25 group.

Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is

available.

In case of this circuit card is used from No. 26 to

31 group (Expansion Group).

Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is

available.

In case of this circuit card is used from No. 0 to

25 group.

Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is

available.

Not used

3-4

ELC/DLC

mode setting This circuit card operates in 16 ELC mode.

This circuit card operates in 8 DLC mode.

Do not set another combination.

Analog Port

Adapter setting Analog Port Adapter is available.

Analog Port Adapter is not available.

6-8 —

Fixed to “OFF”.

SW11

1-8 —

Fixed to all “OFF”.

Details

are shown

in next table.

1ON

2 3 45678

OFF

1ON

2 3 456 7 8

OFF

1ON

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1ON

2 3 45678

OFF

12345678ON

OFF

12345678 ON

OFF

1ON

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1ON

2 3 45678

OFF

1ON

2 3 45678

OFF

1ON

2 3 45678

OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 261

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON

SW10-5: OFF •16 set of Dterms per card.

•Voice Communication only.

•8 set of Dterms per card.

•Data Adapter is used.

SW10-5: ON

•16 set of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

•8 set of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 262

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT

connectors as follows.

•16ELC mode

Figure 3-60 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

312927

302826

312927

302826

Group No.

(Expansion Group)

Highway Block

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 HW11

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 263

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

Figure 3-60 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Highway Block

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 HW11

312927

302826

312927

302826

Group No.

(Expansion Group)

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 264

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

•8DLC mode

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B1 A0

B5 A4

B1 A0

B5 A4

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 31 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Highway Block

HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 HW11

312927

302826

312927

302826

Group No.

(Expansion Group)

Group No.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 265

Revision 4.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW10

SW11

12345678 ON

12345678ON

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 266

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the

system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial

Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card within the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.

max. 600 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

COT

INT SW

CPU GT

Local I/O Bus

(PA-24LCBV)

C. O. LINE

• Loop Resistance : Max 600[Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

• Reverse Function : x 1 circuit

• Stutter Dial Tone

• Message Waiting Lamp

• Encoding Law : µ-law

PUBLIC

NETWORK

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 267

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card

OPE2

OPE1

BL23

BL0

SW00 (MB)

BL23

SW18

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW12

(BNW16-23)

SW17

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 268

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this card are shown below.

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-24LCBV(LC) card have the following meanings.

LED NAME COLOR LED STATUS DESCRIPTION

OPE1 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of Circuit #0-#7 is operating normally.

OPE2 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of Circuit #8-#23 is operating normally.

BL0

BL23 Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in

synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with

the dial pulses coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB) Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

ON Circuit card make-busy

OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel

(normal operating mode)

SW10

(BNW0-7)

Balancing Net-

work Designation

• Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to Circuit

#0-#7.

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A) Note

for long distance.

OFF North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW: 600

Ω Note

for short distance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 269

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15) Balancing Network

Designation

•Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to Circuit

#8-#15.

[the same as previous page]

SW12

(BMW16-23) Balancing Network

Designation

•Each element on

this switch corre-

sponds to Circuit

#16-#23.

[the same as previous page]

SW13

Selection of the User

SW13

-1 SW13

-2 SW13

-3 SW13

-4 North America

ON OFF OFF OFF

SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2Stutter

Dial Tone

ON Stutter Dial tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial tone not Available

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 270

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH

SETTING MEANING

SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3Message Waiting

Lamp

ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing

(Selected and Controlled by Software)

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

5 OFF Fixed to OFF

6 OFF Fixed to OFF

7 OFF Fixed to OFF

8 OFF Fixed to OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 271

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600Ω are composed as follows.

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW18

Polarity reverse or

Momentary Open

ON Momentary open

OFF Polarity reverse

ON OFF

OFF

Slide switch

(RVS) (OPEN)

350 1000

0.21

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B)

600

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 272

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) Note: Normal operating mode is down.

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW12

(BNW16-23)

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

(RVS) (OPEN)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 273

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

7. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure

3-64.

(1) PIM

When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

11109876543210

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 5, LT11 Connector

50 24

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

Located in

LT 4, LT10 Connector

Located in

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 274

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

11109876543210

PIM

Highway Block

LT 5, LT 11 Connector

50 24

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

Located in

LT 4, LT10 Connector

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 275

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

(2) LC Connector Leads

Figure 3-65 LC Connector Lead Accommodation (LC Cable)

LC CABLE

LC Connector (1)

CONN1 Champ Connector

LC Connector (2)

CONN2

LC Connector (3)

CONN3

PKG1

PKG2

PKG3

PKG1

PKG2

PKG3

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 276

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

8. Connecting Route Diagram

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows:

Note: A and B leads for Channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector equipped on the front edge of the card.

Figure 3-66 Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV (LC)

MDF

L2 Jack

Jack

Jack Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

A23

B23

PBX

LT Connector

Installation

Cable

Maximum 600 [ ] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

LC Cable

PA-24LCBV

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 277

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

9. LC Cable Connection

Figure 3-67 Outer View of LC Cable

Earth Cable

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 278

Revision 4.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Figure 3-68 Cable Running of LC Cable (Example)

FRONT

REAR

LC Cable

LC Cable LC Cable

LT Cable

PA-24LCBV

Earth Plate

Earth Cable

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 279

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

1. General Function

This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The Fusion-

Link-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once

the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to

the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel

(or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.

Figure 3-69 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System

BWB

CPU

LP-PM

INT

ETHER NET

CONT

HDLC

CONT

D/I

CONT DTI

CONT

DTI

HUB

(PA-M96)

LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPU

CPR

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE

RJ-45

FRONT CABLE

Note

Note: This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.

FCH

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 280

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

2. Mounting Location/ Condition

The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below.

Figure 3-70 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

OPE

EST3

EST2

EST1

EST0

PWALM

LYR

LOAD

MNT

10-BASE-T

MODE

DTI

FCH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW14

SW13

SW12

SW11

SW10

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 281

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

LYR

Green Remains lit while the Fusion link is established.

Flash Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM)

OFF Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test result

is not fair.

LB Green Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use.

OFF Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready.

LOAD

Green Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.

(Forwarding Status)

Flash

(60 IPM) Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.

(Blocking Status)

Flash

(120 IPM) Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.

(Learning Status)

OFF Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.

(Null Status)

EST3 Green Remains lit while sending data.

EST2 Green Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal.

EST1 Green Remains lit while receiving data.

EST0 Green Remains lit while the link is established.

PWALM Red Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

Note

UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 282

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

Note: The following operations are required prior to extracting the card.

(1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch.

(2.) Flip the MB switch.

When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.

Note: T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the

shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.

MNT

0OFF ×Not used.

1OFF ×Not used.

2OFF ×Not used.

Note

ON Make-busy-request.

OFF ×Cancel the Make-busy-request.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MODE

0 - 7 Not used.

8×Standard setting.

(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

9Fusion link test mode.

(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

A - F Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW10

Note

ON T203 timer value is variable.

OFF ×T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds.

2~8 OFF ×Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 283

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW11

Note 1

1ON

This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

8ON

OFF

SW11 D/I channel of T1

SW11-1 CH 0

SW11-2 CH 1

SW11-3 CH2

SW11-4 CH 3

SW11-5 CH 4

SW11-6 CH 5

SW11-7 CH 6

SW11-8 CH 7

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 284

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

Note 1: When “n” is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.

When “n” is one or more, the corresponding D channels as “n” must be designated by SW11-SW12.

SW12

Note 1

1ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW12 D/I channel of T1

SW12-1 CH 8

SW12-2 CH 9

SW12-3 CH 10

SW12-4 CH 11

SW12-5 CH 12

SW12-6 CH 13

SW12-7 CH 14

SW12-8 CH 15

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 285

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW13

1ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

8ON

OFF

SW14

1ON ×Positive logic for the D/I CONT

OFF Negative logic for the D/I CONT

Note 2

ON ×The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.

OFF

Note 2

ON ×

OFF

Note 3

ON Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link

performs as the “network.”

OFF LAPD signal link performs as the “user.”

SW13 D/I channel of T1

SW13-1 CH 16

SW13-2 CH 17

SW13-3 CH 18

SW13-4 CH 19

SW13-5 CH 20

SW13-6 CH 21

SW13-7 CH 22

SW13-8 CH 23

SW14-2 SW14-3 SPEED

ON ON 64 Kbps × n

ON OFF 56 Kbps × n

OFF ON 48 Kbps × n

OFF OFF Not used

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 286

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.

Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing.

Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code

Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).

Note 3: When a node is set “network,” the distant node over the fusion link should be set “user,” and vice versa.

6. External Interface

The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown in Figure 3-71.

Figure 3-71 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection

24DTRFCH

10AL (10) FLT CA

10 BASE-T

straight cable

DTI

FCH CN2

HUB

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 287

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

See the following figure when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a

cascade connection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection.

One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH

card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5)

FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card.

As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection.

(a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card)

(b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)

Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. Note

Figure 3-72 FCH Cascade Connection

Note: A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1’ 7.6 ”).

24DTR FCH FCH FCH

Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH Note

To the next

FCH/CCH/DCH

CN2

DTI

FCH

DTI

FCH

DTI

FCH

To HUB

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 288

Revision 4.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MNT

MODE

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 289

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

PA-M96

HUB

1. General Function

This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the

10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card.

As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI)

and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.

Figure 3-73 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System

Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration.

CPU LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPR #0

CPU LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPR #1

TO/FROM

THE OTHER FUSION

NODE

TO/FROM

THE OTHER FUSION

NODE

DTI

FCH

HUB

(PA-M96)

HUB

(PA-M96)

10BASE-T cross cable is used

for cascade connection

10BASE-T straight cable

Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 290

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-74.

Figure 3-74 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM0

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

OPE

CRS7

CRS0

SENS

TP7-X

TP6-X

TP5-X

TP4-X

TP3-X

TP2-X

TP1-X

TP0-X

ST7

ST0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 291

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally

regardless of the cable polarity.

Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048bit-

times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the

collision is over.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

CRS0~CRS7 Green Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port.

ST0~ST7 Green

The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as

shown in the table below.

SEL SWITCH MEANINGS

0Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port

is reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1

Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the

TPn-X port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp

may light regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n =

0~7)

Lights when the TPn-X port is normal.

Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port.

(n = 0~7) Note 2

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 292

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

5. Switch Setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SENSE

0 Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7).

1Not used.

2×TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7).

3Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports

(n = 0~7).

4 - F Not used

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 293

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

6. External Interface

24DTR

CN2

FCH

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

10 BASE-T straight Cable

HUB

10AL (10) FLT CA

DTI

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 294

Revision 4.0

PA-M96

HUB

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SEL

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 295

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

1. Function

This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP

signals, PB signals, MF signals).

Figure 3-75 Location of the PA-8RSTM Card in the System

ATT

COT

TLT

TSW

ATI

Station

C.O. Line

Tie Line

RST

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 296

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

Mounting Module

PIM

OPE

BLS7

BLS4

MBS7

MBS4

BLR7

BLR4

MBR7

MBR4

BLS3

BLS0

MBS3

MBS0

BLR3

BLR0

MBR3

MBR0

SW11

~~~

SW10

SW04

SW03

SW02

SW01

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 297

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BLR0

BLR7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0

BLS7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

MBR0~3

(SW01)

0ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBR4~7

(SW03)

4ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 298

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MBR4~7

(SW03) 7ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS0~3

(SW02)

0ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS4~7

(SW04)

4ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

7ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 299

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10

OFF

7OFF×Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).

8ON×Fixed

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON ON ON -21 dBm0

OFF ON ON -23 dBm0

ON OFF ON -25 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0

ON ON OFF -29 dBm0

(Standard Setting)

OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD

VALUE

ON ON ON -17 dBm0

OFF ON ON -19 dBm0

ON OFF ON -21 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -23 dBm0

(Standard Setting)

ON ON OFF -25 dBm0

OFF ON OFF -27 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -29 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -31 dBm0

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 300

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T

OFF MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5

ON PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)

OFF PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

3OFF×Fixed

4ON Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR.

5ON Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR.

6ON ×DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.

OFF DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.

7OFF×No setting (Fixed to OFF)

8OFF×Fixed

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 301

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTM

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

MBR0-3

(SW01)

MBR4-7

(SW03)

MBS0-3

(SW02)

MBS4-7

(SW04)

SW10

SW11

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

ON 12345678

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 302

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

1. General Function

The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this

card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions

and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending

digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has “Register Sender” function, by which inter-

digit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without

intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.

Figure 3-76 Location of PA-8RSTY (RST) Within the System

GTCPU

TSWINT INT

PB line

PBR

DPR

DPS

PBS

I/O Local Bus

DP Telephone

Caller ID signals

NETWORK

PA-8RSTY

OFF HOOK

(LC for Calling

Number Delivery)

PBR:

PBS:

DPR:

DPS:

Push Button Receiver

PB Signal Sender

Dial Pulse Register

Dial Pulse Sender

PB Signal

DP Signal

OGT

This figure shows “Register Sender” function as an example.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 303

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-77.

Note: Layout of Lamps and switches are differ from other RST cards.

Figure 3-77 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (RST)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

OPE

SW00 (MB)

BLS7

BLS4

BLS3

BLS0

BLS7

BLS4

BLS3

BLS0

SW02

SW01

SW10

1234

SW13

1234

SW12

1234

SW14

1234

SW15

1234

SW11

1234

SW16

1234

SW17

1234

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 304

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BLR0

BLR7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0

BLS7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 305

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME

SWIT

NO.

SET-

TING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(SW00)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01

(MBR0-7)

0 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

0OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

1 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

1OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

2 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

2OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

3 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

3OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

4 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

4OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

5 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

5OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

6 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

6OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

7 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

7OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

SW02

(MBS0-7)

0 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

0OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

1 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

1OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

2 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

2OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

3 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

3OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

4 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

4OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

5 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

5OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

6 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

6OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

7 ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

7OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 306

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW10

DTMF Signal

Receiver

Threshold Value

[Standard Setting]

4OFF Fixed to OFF

SW11

MFR Signal Receiver

Threshold Value [Standard Setting]

4OFF Fixed to OFF

1 2 3 4

OFF

1 2 3 4

Selection of PBR Threshold Value

SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3

DTMF Threshold Value

OFF

-21.0 dBm0

-23.0 dBm0

-25.0 dBm0

-27.0 dBm0

-29.0 dBm0

-31.0 dBm0

-33.0 dBm0

-35.0 dBm0

1 2 3 4

OFF

1 2 3 4

Selection of MFR Threshold Value

SW11-1 SW11-2 SW11-3

MFR Threshold Value

OFF

-17.0 dBm0

-19.0 dBm0

-21.0 dBm0

-23.0 dBm0

-25.0 dBm0

-27.0 dBm0

-29.0 dBm0

-31.0 dBm0

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 307

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW12

1Designation of MFR

Specification

•AT & T specification

•ITU-T No. 5 specification

2DTMF Signal

Cut-off Guard

Timer

•SHORT (less than 10 ms)

[Standard Setting]

•LONG (less than 20 ms)

3Register Selection

(MFR/PBR)

•REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.

•REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.

4Register Selection

(MFR/PBR)

•REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.

•REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.

1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 308

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13

1ON MF Transmission Level:-9dBm

OFF MF Transmission Level:-5dBm

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW14

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW15

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW16

1ON ×Fixed to ON

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW17

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 309

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

Circuit card make busy cancel.

Standard Setting: Down

SW01

(MBR0-7)

SW02

(MBS0-7)

SW10

SW11

OFF

ON 1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 310

Revision 4.0

PA-8RSTY

PIM

SW12

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

1 2 3 4

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 311

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.

This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the

PA-SDTB card.

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System

F u s i o n

Node-A

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Link (Data Link)

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

Internal LAN

FCH

Node-B

Internal LAN

FCH

Fusion Link with FCCH

Fusion Link without FCCH

F u s i o n

Node-A

Internal LAN

Node-B

) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 312

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this

card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.

Mounting conditions are shown below.

•Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables.

•For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>

•For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>

•Fiber optic cables are connected to this card.

•Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and

TSW.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 313

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example: When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system

As shown in Figure 3-79, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/

PIM3 is not actually mounted.

Figure 3-79 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX1A

MUX0A

MUX0B

MUX1B

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PIM3

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM2

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM1

PIM0

LPM

I/O

PCM

I/O

PCM

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 314

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-80.

Figure 3-80 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)

PCM

P-SW

I/O

SW11 SW12

OPE

ACT

PALM

OPT

SYNC

LPB

12345678

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 315

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally.

Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

PALM Red Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal.

OPT Red Lights when the optical input signals are cut off.

SYNC Red Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock synchronization.

LPB Green Lights when Loop-back is designated.

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW11

1OFF ×Fixed

2ON ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

5OFF ×Not used

6ON PAD function is effective.

OFF ×PAD function is not effective.

7ON Setting of A-law

OFF ×Setting of µ-law

8ON ×OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0)

OFF OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1)

SW12 1-8 OFF ×Not used

P-SW

1ON Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back)

OFF ×Designation of OLLPB cancel

2ON Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back)

OFF ×Designation of ORLPB cancel.

3OFF ×Not used

4ON Make-busy request

OFF ×Make-busy request cancel

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 316

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

6. External Interface

•Cable Connection

Figure 3-81 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB

PA-SDTB

PA-SDTA

Fiber optic cable

Note1

SDT CABLEB <S>

Note: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 317

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-82.

Figure 3-82 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

Accommodated in ➀

LT1, 5, 7, 11 connector

50 24

Accommodated in ➁

LT2, 4, 8, 10 connector

POUT B POUT A

50 24

Accommodated in ➂

LT3, 5, 9, 11 connector

POUT B POUT A

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Highway Block

Slot No.

LT connector

PIM

0 1 32 4 5 6 7 98 10 11

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 318

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system

As shown in the following figure, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if

PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted.

Figure 3-83 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX1A

MUX0A

MUX0B

MUX1B

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PIM3

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM2

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM1

PIM0

MT24 TSW CA-140

LPM

I/O

PCM

I/O

PCM

Note

Note: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 319

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system

(a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable:

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW

CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies

depending on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).

Table 3-4 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable

(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot:

Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined by

the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.

Table 3-5 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot

Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration.

Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the

remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PIM3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J

PIM2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

PIM1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

PIM0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

MODULE

GROUP

Assigned for

SDT

TIME SLOTS

Assigned for

SDT

CABLE CONNECTIONS

REMARKS

FROM

(Connectors on

PA-SDTB)

(Connectors on

BWB of TSWM)

MG01

PIM2 of IMG0 MUX0A MUX002 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG0 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX102

PIM3 of IMG0 MUX0B MUX003

MUX1B MUX103

MG03

PIM2 of IMG1 MUX0A MUX012 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG1 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX112

PIM3 of IMG1 MUX0B MUX013

MUX1B MUX113

MG05

PIM2 of IMG2 MUX0A MUX022 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG2 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX122

PIM3 of IMG2 MUX0B MUX023

MUX1B MUX123

MG07

PIM2 of IMG3 MUX0A MUX032 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG3 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX132

PIM3 of IMG3 MUX0B MUX033

MUX1B MUX133

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 320

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and

PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown

in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship

to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be

mounted in any PIM.

Figure 3-84 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System

PA-SDTB

PIM 3 Time slots assigned

for SDT (MG07).

PIM2 and PIM3 of

IMG3 are not actually

mounted.

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

(Refer to Table 3-3.)

To MUX133

To MUX033

To MUX132

To MUX032

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG2

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

TSWM

IMG1

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM

IMG0

PIM3

BWB of TSWM

MUX0A

MUX1A

MUX0B

MUX1B

Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT.

(Refer to Table 3-5 and Figure 3-85.)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 321

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Figure 3-85 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

MUX003 MUX002

MUX013 MUX012

MUX023 MUX022

MUX033 MUX032

MUX103 MUX102

MUX113 MUX112

MUX123 MUX122

MUX133 MUX132

MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 322

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3-86

shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.

Figure 3-86 Level Diagram

Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is shown in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6 Level Margin

Note:

Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.

CONDITION LEVEL MARGIN

Worst case 4.0 dB

Best case 11.0 dB

0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 (km)

0.00

-5.00

-10.00

-15.00

-20.00

-25.00

-30.00

-35.00

Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm

Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm

: Best Case

: Worst Case

: Maximum Receiver Sensitivity

: Minimum Receiver Sensitivity

Cable Length

1.20 2.40 3.70 4.40 6.20 7.40 8.60 9.90 11.00 12.00 (miles)

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 323

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW11

SW12

P-SW

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 324

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.

This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the

PA-SDTA card.

Figure 3-87 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System

F u s i o n

Node-A

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Link (Data Link)

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

Internal LAN

FCH

Node-B

Internal LAN

FCH

Fusion Link with FCCH

Fusion Link without FCCH

F u s i o n

Node-A

Internal LAN

Node-B

) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 325

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.

Mounting conditions are shown below.

•Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables.

•For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>

•For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>

•This card is connected to the TSW card.

•Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and

TSW.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 326

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-88.

Figure 3-88 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)

PCM

MUX0A

MUX1A

MUX0B

MUX1B

I/O

OPE

2MALA

2MALB

32MALA

32MALB

ACT0

ACT1

SYC0A

SYC1A

SYC0B

SYC1B

ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page 327

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT 2/3.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation.

Red Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation.

2MALA Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal.

2MALB Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALA Red Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALB Red Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal.

ACT0 Green Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally.

Off Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state.

ACT1 Green Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally.

Off Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state.

SYC0A Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC1A Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC0B Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC1B Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

CHAPTER 3 ND-70182 (E)

Page 328

Revision 4.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

6. External Interface

Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual PDF NEC

NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual

NEC NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEC_NEAX2400_IMX_Circuit_Card_Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation